Google
This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at |http: //books .google .com/I
A>^^
HARVARD
COLLEGE
LIBRARY
Preservation facsimile
printed on alkaline/buffered paper
and bound by
Acme Bookbinding
Charlestown, Massachusetts
2004
feacbarti (S^oUcgc l,ibrarQ
FROM THK MEMORIAL Fl«D
KING OF SI.UI, SIAMESE PRINCES AND
OFFICIALS, AND BV FOREIGN
RESIDENTS OF B.\NGKOK
EDWARD HENRY STROBEL
(Class or 1S77)
GENERAL ADVISER TO THE
SIAMESE GOVERNMENT
FOR TKS rURCHASB OP BOOKS ON SIAM
AK
ELEMENTARY HAND-BOOK
OP THE
SIAMESE LANGUAGE
BY
BASIL OSBORN ^TWMGHT, B. A.,
Exhibitioner of Kino'S Cokxeoe, Cambridok.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
BANGKOK:
Prixtid at " Tm Auerican Presbtteriam Mission Press,
1906.
»»
LUZAC CO. Co.,
LONDON.
adG.dk
HARVARD UNIVERSITY
UBRARY
SEP 29 2004
ERRATA.
The Student is advised to make the following
corrections in his book.
Page une For Read
16 Ex8B2 lu im
68 17 feu eiu
72 20 particles particle
78 10 '•" ^^
83 2 Enjgish English
90 18 adj^tive adjectives
116 14 y'- 5if
140 6 '' 1'
149 u nuhi iitiw
160 , 13 '^^'"^ '^^'^
181 2 fi^i . fin
185 10 0^1 OUT
205 13 ""^y ""^^
206 1
2^ 10 ni\^ '\^n^
22Z 8 ill i^tji
225 10 iii »,tiT
1 1? *^ fe
252 10-12 8„«T s«i
261 10 nJ ^
268 10 ii, ^,
LIST OP SUBSCRIBERS TO THE
FIRST EDITIOK
G. J. Adams
J. Addison
H. C. Andersen
J. Andr^
N. RBaasch
A E. Baguley
M. C, Beaton
J. R Bell
F. H. Bingham
J. Stewart Black
C. Bodenstab
Dr. Btthmer (2)
The Bombay Burmah Co«
K W. Bourke
E. Brande
R H. Brown
Oscar Browning M. A
(Cambridge)
6. R Brooks
K Bryan
R Bryant
J. Bruun
W. J. Bums
J. D. Byrne
11 Cacace
F. Campbell
A. C. Carter
Dr. M. Carthew
A. R Cams
R H. Chubb
H. W. Clarke
F. Clements
J. F. Cola^o
H. CoUingwood
Th. Colhnann
Rev. R Columbet
A. Willard Cooper
L.Day
F. Dean
A. J. Dickson
F. Didier
Dr. F. Dietzel
W. J. Doughty-Renong
W. Duncan
The East Asiatic Co.
0. Fckert
W. A. Elder .
J. E. EUam
N. R Eltekoff
G. F. Weston-Elwes
F. Fairweather
Messr& Falck & Beidek
R Feit
RFr^:e
J. R Gandy
V.Gedde
A. Genkel
R B. H. Gibbins
F. L. Gill (Miss)
Luang Gini
F. G. Gorton
R Gosnell
Richard G^tte
H. G. Gough
iv. List of Subscribers to the First Edition
A. W. Graham
D.McGlashen
Canon Greenstock (2)
A. Maire
W. Grossjohann
F. Hamacher
M. Mannsf eldt
E. H. V. Mayne
Dr. T. H. Hays (2)
K W. Hedgeland
W. Meyer
J. A. Minto
A. Hepgie
S. H. Rendrick .
K C. Monod
M. A. Morrison
W. a Hill
W. Mundie
W. H. Hinchley
N. Nakashima (Miss)
H. Hooker
M. N. Nathan
K Hutchinson
F. Neubronner (Penang)
Capt N. Ivancich
A. P. Norman
W. F. Jacobsen
H. Park
J. Caulf eild James (2)
R E. Payne
A« Jensen
D. A. Pestonji
F. G. de Jesus
M. Pickenpack (Hamb'rg>
G. de Jesus
NaiPoh
W. G, Johnson
PhraNaiWai
T. Jones
Norman Prentice
Aa^ Jonsen
Gl J^rgensen
Messrs. Probsthain & O).^
London (6;
Khaw Oo Soo
H. R H. Ftmce Rajani
L. Killian
H. E. Phya Narissa
E« Eluzer
Rajakitch (Tokio)
K Eono (Miss)
C. H. Ramsay
J. van Langenburg
Eric. S. J. Lawson
G. Kennedy Reid
J. S. Reese
M. D. O'Leary
C. Roberts
G.Lee
J. Robertson
H. S. Leonard
C. Robyns
A. Lessler
G. Rowland
J. W. Lindsay
F. Sampson
A. Listermann f Singapore)
R Schultz
W. H. Tiloyd
J. Macbetn
H. Schween
H. G. Scott
Dr. H. D. Mackenzie
P.Scott
List of Subsgribebs to the Fibst Edition v.
L J. Sequeira
W. W. Shand
W. P. Smart (2)
H. K Spivey
W. J. Steel
Dr. Ph. Stoeimer
A. Storm
J. Strachan
W. G. Swan
J. EL S¥rai)ston
KTanab^
J. Tanaka (Tokio)
L. B. Taylor
W. Taylor
H. Thomson
A. P. G. Tllleke
W. A. G. Tilleke
C. G. Timonelli
S.Ti88eman
M. Topenot
E. W. Trotter
P. Trotter
E. N.Turner
L Th. Unv^rzagt
T. M. Upton (3)
A. Van
V. Virgeen
L. VolM)erta
J. Waldoui^r
H.E.Ware
C. B. West
J. L Westengard
K J.Wood
T. Yasui (Miss)
TABLE OP CONTENTS.
Page
Preface - - - VIH
Books Recommended r - XI
Addenda - - - XII
Errata - - - XIII
Introduction - - - 1
Chapter L— The Low Class Consonants- 3
Chapter IL— The Simple Vowels - 7
Chapter IIL-The Middle Class Conson-
ants N.M.Ng - - 12
Chapter IV.— Compound Vowelsand Diph-
thongs - - 17
Chi^ter V.— The Tones (Introduction) - 23
Chapter VL— The High Class Consonants
Rising and Acute Tones - 26
Chapter VIL— Deep and Dropped Tones - 33
Chapter Vni.— Tones of Words ending in 37
IL P. T. and Short Vowels
Chapter IX.— Haw Num; Recapitulation 41
of Tones
Chapter X.— Double Initial Consonants, &c. 60
Chapter XI.— Numerals - - 57
Chapter XH— The Simple Sentence (Intro-
ductory) - - 60
Chapter XIII. —The Noun - - 66
Table of Ck>NTEMT8 vii.
Chapter XIV.— The Verb - - 80
Cliapter XV. -The Adjective - 90
Chapter XVL— The Pronouns - 96
Chapter XVII.-The Adverb - 104
Chapter XVIIL— Prepositions Conjunctions
Interjections - - 111
Chapter XIX,— Time Honey Weights and
Measures - - 116
Chapter XX — Some Miscellaneous Siamese '
Idioms - - 130
Chapter XXL-Letter Writing - 143
Chapter XXII,— The Court Language - 147
Chapter XXIII,— Some Points of Siamese
Orthography - - 152
Miscellaneous Exercises (44-70^ - 170
Easy Passages for Translation into
English (71-89,) - 197
Easy Passages for Translation into
Siamese (90-100,) - . 214
Newspaper Cuttings (101-115,) - 222
Siamese Letters (116-135,) - 234
Harder Passages (Siamese) 135-150 with notes 252
Appendix A. - - - 282
Appendix B. - - - 309
English-Siamese Vocabulary - 321
Siamese-English Vocabulary - 343
AUTHOR'S PREFACE.
I
N this book, an attempt has been made for the firdt
time, to set forth in English, a method of acquiring
a practical working knowledge of the Samese
language. This method is one which the author has
found by practical experience to be one, which can be
succesf luly followed by the majority of learners.
Hitherto those who have triedtoacquire the lang-
uage from a native teacher, have laboured under two
great djsadvantages, firstly that so very few Siamese
teachers have a sufficient knowledge of English to
enable them to make explanations in nec€»sary detail,
and, secondly that they use a method, which although
suitable forteachinetheSiamese language to a Siamese
child, is one which is hard of comprehension by a
foreigner. The author trusts that this book will
remove these disadvantaj^ by giving the rules and
explanations, and by indicating an applicable method.
The real work therefore of the Siamese teacher, is in
the earlier part of the book, to teach the learner the
correct pronunciation, and, in the latter part, to help
him to tnmslate English into good Siamese.
In the earlier exercises Nos. 26 to 88 for
translation into English, the Siamese is not very
idiomatic. This has been purposely arranged so as
not to give the learner too many difficulties to deal
with at first. It is useful for the learner to compare
these sentences with the same sentences rendered
into strictly idiomatic Siamese, in a small book
entitled '' Exercises for Translation" by the same
author. Siamese is distinctly a difficult language
especiallv as regards the correct pronunciation, on
which tne meanings of the majority of words so
vitally depends. A word of caution is therefore
necessary to would-be learners, and especially to those
Author's Pbbface ix.
who imagine they can '' pick up " a smattering of the
language ina few weeks by tryinjg^ to learn words or
sentences in a parrot like fashion from romanised
versions which are invariably most misleading. To
tiy to do this is merely absolute waste of time, money
and frequently of temper also.
The author has found bv practical experience,
that a working knowledge oi the language can be
acquired by average persons with proper tuition and
diligence on the part of the learner in about 6—8
months, and by those with linguistic abilities in a
somewhat shorter period.
It is a matter of regret that a few errata have
been allowed to pass uncorrected. The learner is
advised to make the corrections indicated on page xiii.
The author trusts in a subsequejit edition
(should it be called for) that these defects will be
eliminated.
In conclusion the author begs to tender his best
thanks to those who have so kindly assisted in the
Sroduction of this work. His obligations are especially
ue to H. E. Phya Visuddha, Vice-Minister of Public
Instruction. Pra Bhaisala, Dr. 0. Frankfurter, Ph. D.,
Mom Luang Yaam and Nai Boon Hen^, for their
kindness in correcting proof sheets and giving many
valuable hints and suggestions.
He also begs to thank H. E. Phya Visuddha
and H. E Phya Sn Sahadheb, (Vice-Minister of the
Interior) for their kind permission to use certain
extracts from their books for translation exercises. To
the former for Exercises 144, 145 and 146 taken from
6ui RTOJ u^ dnjw mu'
X. Author's Preface
To the latter for Exercises 142, 14$, and 148
taken from inj: tin iirJi^ wRri-irilTi(hi dnmff tJ»YiR ^td-
Bangkok :
October, 1906.
Note to Siamese Teachers.
It must be distinctly remembered that many of
the combinations of characters used in the earlier
exercises (Exercises 2-26 inclusive) are merely sounds
and not words. 'Die above exercises are for reading
only and hence have been constructed somewhat on
the lines of an ordinary English reading primer in
which sounds such as ab eb ib ob ub are employed at
first Of course occasional words do occur nere and
there, but the student is not supposed to learn the
meanings of any words until he reaches Chapter XI.
Abbreviations used m this Book.
F. S. R. » First Siamese Reading Book
D. P. = Designatory Particle.
C. F. = Compare.
m
;' N. = Noun.
r ..:: ; ,.v!:: ss^-Verb.
BOOKS RECOMMENDED FOR THE
STUDY OF SIAMESE.
Readers.
1. The First Siamese Reading Book [ uuu
duu m iiku vAi ] sold everywhere in Bangkok 12th
Edition price 28 atts.
2. The First Siamese Reader [ uuu trou diu
ifSii viti ] price 16 atts.
3. wififtQ tJjjj n m u^n jn price 16 atts (for
very elementary reading. )
4. The Second Siamese Reading Book [ imu
ihiu Ifc iibi flroi J for practice in orthography.
Books for Translation.
5. "The Ladder of Knowledge*' series,
volume 3 (Morant) price 2J ticals [ iKi 1« iiJjj aijj
for fturther practice in translating easy English
passages into Siamese. ^-
6. " The Journeys of the Siamese Anibas-
sadors to London and Paris'' price 3 and 5
salungs each respectively published by S. J.Smith
Printmg Office Bangkolem Bangkok for transla-
tion from Siamese into English (fairly easy).
7* ct: yitj i«f?[s nz rw ^m^u iJjn^iH d^uviR fj^nJ
price 6 ticdls (more difficult) Published at Luang
Damrong's Printing office See kak Sow Ching
Gha Bangkok.
ADDENDA.
To page 72. Uses of the Designatory Particles,
(i) With every numerical expression,
(ii) With such words as t^siu >ft) t&«
The Designatory particles are generally
omitted with.
(i) Material nouns.
(ii) Generic statements, e. g. He sells
knives.
(iii) Possessiveadjectivesandthephrases
To page 135.
16. The Cc mparative without ' than ' is
expressed jn Siamese by 4u not nri-
Example. You must write better.
But You must write better than this.
To page 160.
line 11. add. B^^Jn^^'' February.
INTRODUCTION.
m H E Siamese language belongs to the class
^^ of ' Toned ' languages. It is devoid of ail
grammatical inflections and^ since the bulk of the
words are monosyllabic, dilferent ideas have to
be expressed by using the same or similar com-
binations of characters. To differentiate these
combinations into words it often happens that a
given combination of characters has to be pro-
nounced in different tones of the voice. It is of
the greatest importance to the learner that he
should become familiar with these different
.tones, as it is upon this point that it greatly
depends whether he makes himself understood
or not. There is no greater error than to sup-
pose that these tone differences are of slight
importance. They are the most vital point and
the whole cnuu of the Siamese language. It is
practically impossible to express adequately
these tone differences on paper. Many have
tried to do so, but the resulting multiplicity of
-arbitrary signs and accents has only made
^Confusion worse confounded/
The oiily way for the student to become
familiarised with the tones, is to hear them over
and over again from a well educated Siamese,
and to be thoroughly acquainted^ with the rules
which govern tne tones. Another point of
diflficulty in representing Siamese words in
Romanised form-is that certain of the Siamese
( 2 )
vowels and consonants have no exact English
equivalents.
It is but sheer waste of time for the would-
be learner to try to ''pick-uj)'' words and
sentences from Romanised versions, for these
reasons. In the first place he will not be able
to acquire the. correct pronunciation of any but
the simplest words, ana secondly, his knowledge
of the language so acquired would be merely
empirical.
The great secret of learning to speak
Siamese correctly is this. Firstly, learn the
values of the different characters and become
familiarised with the tones, before trying to
make even the simplest sentence. Secondly^
always try to remember how a word is spelled,
as then it is easy to know its correct pronuncia-
tion. No living language can be properly learnt
from books alone, the assistance of a competent
tesxiier is 2i sine qtui non.
The Siamese language is by no means a
homogenous ona There are a great many
words of Chinese, Laos, and other words in-
corporated into the ordinary speech of the
people, while the bulk of the words used in
Higher or Court Siamese are derived or taken
directly from Pali and Sanskrit. A fair number
of these Pali and Sanskrit derivatives, are^
however used in the ordinary language,
Besides these, there are a few European
words principally English, which have been,
taken mto the Siamese language.
(3 )
The author has compiled this book with the
object of its being used together with the ser-
vices of an intelligent teacher.
The author, having had considerable ex-
perience in the teaching of Siamese to Europeans,
nas come to the conclusion that it is quite impos-
sible to represent the sound of a Siamese word
by such a combination by letters which will be
intelligible to Europeans of different nationalities.
For example, an Englishman will represent
the sound of a given Siamese word by one com-
bination, a . German, by another, a Dane by a
third and so forth. The author therefore has
not given any Romanised equivalents except in
the simple cases of the vowels and consonants.
In such cases the equivalents are to be pronounc-
ed according to standard Endish pronunciation
unless otherwise directed. If the learner cares
to do so, he can write down the sound of any
combination in his book by whatever combina-
tion of letters he may think best after being able
to reproduce the sound correctly.
The learner should procure a copy of the
First Siamese Reading Book [ uuti Hw hiui^^] to
be used as directed in conjunction with this book.
Chapter I.
The first thing for the Student to do, is to
be able to recognise the more common of the
Siamese characters.
( 4 )
The Consonants.
In Siamese there are 44 consonants. They
are divided into 3 classes.
A. Low Class Consonants.
B. Middle Class Consonants.
C. High Class Consonants.
It is of great importance (for a reason to be
explained latere to remember to which of these
thre3 classes each consonant belongs. Some of
these 44 consonants are but rarely used in com-
parison with the others. It is therefore the
best plan not to attempt to learn them all at
once, out to take them a few at a time, begin-
ning with those which are of most frequent
occurrence.
The Low Class Consonants.
This class contains 24 consonants.
They are pronounced in the ordinary or
'Common tone ot Voice.
The consonants of the Low Class of the
most frequent occurrence are: —
fl pronounced khaw equivalent to kh (aspted).
H\ „ chaw „ „ ch (soft)
JJ „ maw „ „ m
( 5 )
W ' „ paw ,, . „ P
*fl M paw „ ,f p
J . ,, raw ^9 9 9 r.
^ . „ saw „ „ 8
yi;v. » taw „ „ t
*fi- „ taw „ „ t
% „ law „ „ 1
*). \ ",; \^ „ „ w
ti ** • „ yaw „ „ y
* UJ „ yaw „ „ y
' fl-^ >» naw yf >> "
>J.- „ ngaw „ „ ng
( 6 )
It will be seen that there are two forms each
equivalent to P. Y. T. % a aqj. % J. but they
are pronounced exactly alike in each case. Some
words in Siamese are spelled with one character,
and others with the other character. The
characters marked with an asterisk {*) are less
conmionly used.
Special attention should be paid to the letter
4 (ng). There are many words in Siam^e which
have 4 as the initial consonant.
Europeans will as a general rule, find some
difficulty m pronouncing this letter as an initial
consonant. The best method to acquire the
pronunciation of initial ^ is to take such words
as "running or walking '* and try to slur the
first two words together to produce the sound
^runningor' with the stress on the last syllable,
and then to make the sound ** ngor " by itself.
The remaining low class consonants will be
dealt with later (Chapter 10)
The Student is advised to write down these
characters several times on a piece of paper so
as to become familiarised with them.
N.B.— In writing Siamese characters, alwajrs
begin with the small circle which occurs
in all the characters except two. The
shapes closely resembling those of the
printed characters.
( 7 )
Exercise L
Read these Characters.
Ti/ n u fl a in Q Pi u n n
N,B._ — The Siamese consonants are vocalised with
the sound 'aw* as in the word law/ just as
in English, the letters b.cd. are vocalised
as *bee, cee, dee.'
Chapter II.
The Simple Vowels.
By * simple ' vowels are meant vowels which
are represented by one character only .
•
Simple ' vowels can be divided into four
classes according to the position which they
occupy relatively to th6 consonant with whicn
they are sounded.
N.B. — The vowel characters can never stand
alone, they must be always accompanied
by a consonant.
1. First Class. — Vowels written AFTER the
consonant with which they are sounded.
( 8 )
1 Sounded as ft in Father ex. m Khft
e
1 „ um in Sum ex. rtl Khum
2^ „ {& very short) as the final a
in the word: America. Pi: Khft'
The vowel r has a very short sound, and
the breath must be cut off sharply. .
i and Z cannot be followed by another con-
sonant in the same syllable.
Exercise 2.
Read these sounds.
m fli yn Hi Ji iili m to u) ^i vii v 7)
iti dn rii ii ri ?li jji £ji 141 Ti m 4i ai
* K tc vc K K it at Ui ut Z TZ T. •}
mjjaiDjiaraifnEjrTiTic^in
2. Second Clcufs. — Vowels written UNDER-
NEATH the consonant with which they are
sounded.
Sounded as od short as in Cook ^ Kh()o
u „ „ 00 long „ in Boot f\ Khoo
( 9 )
Exercise 3.
Read these sounds.
n
U
n
V
7
i
n
n
11
s
a
g
4
T
T
t
t
f
T
T
T
t
t
T
t
T
PI
U
fl
u
J
y1
n
a
1
3
?,
g
^
n
B
u
n
!l
a
ij
fl
ti
U
^
Yl
a
i
i)
9
7
T
a
T
ti
^
TI
ti
?
T
«
* For the correct pronunciation of these syllables
marked * see Chapter. 8.
3. Third Class. — Vowels written ABOVE
the consonant with which thev are sounded.
^ sounded as i (short) as in Hit fi Kht
^ ,, „ ee(long) „ See^Khee
^ „ „ eii (short) ,, the French word
Peu; no true English equivalent. PI Kheil.
4<| Sounded as eu (long) as in the French
word Coeur; no true English equivalent.
^ Kheu.
^ this vowel has a sound which is a mean
between the sound of a (short) as in
hat and a (short) as in hut.
The vowel ^ will be considered later as
it must always be followed by another con-
sonant.
see Chapter 3.
( 10 )
Exercise 4.
Read these sounds.
4. Fourth Class. — Vowels written BEFORE the
consonant after which they are sounded.
L sounded as a in Fame e.g. \jf\ Kha.
11 ,, ,, a in Sand only longer, and
' more drawled out IW Kh^:
\ sound as 6 (long) as in So. in Kh6.
t „ „i „ as in Sigh. Ifl Khi.
\ if „ do. do. In Khi.
I and \ are sounded exactly alike.
( 11 )
Exercise 6.
Read these sounds.
UJ
m
u
in 19 ii iw in
IT
•
in
ii<
UPI
lu
irn un Lig UN im
ft
u>
iin
•
iiij
1)1
Ifl
1^
Ifl In 1q In Iti
1,
la
li<
%
M
14
In In li 1w Iti
%
u
in
1t<
if
In li li Iw Iti
J
In
111
m
lis
la
In lu lu iin In
1j
la
im
Note. — The student should learn later on, the
names of the vowels in Siamese. They
. are called sra^ or mai as a general rule.
1 is called lakhang.
t II are called teen 60 and teen 60 respectively.
L is called mai nah.
L . ^, mai malai.
1
1
99
99
mai mooan.
mai 6h. .
mai pat'.
The rest are called sra, i.e. i 2 -. ^ a a sra um
sra &, I, etc.
U is called m4i nah song an— double mai nah
( 12 )
Chapter III.
The MroDLE Class Consonants.
Words ending with jj u ^
The Middle Class Consonants, 9 in number,
(two of which are rarely used) are pronounced
in the common or ordinary tone of voice.
Four of them namely n W ll ^ present no little
difficulty at first, as they have no exact English
equivalents.
fl This letter has a sound which may be
represented approximately by | k and i g or
unaspirated k. The sound of the letter n is quite
different from that of Pi and this difference can
only be learnt from the teacher. Be very care-
ful not to pronounce it as Gaw.
^ This letter is about equivalent to tch or
dj. tj. It has a sound somewhat like t in the
word century when it is pronounced centjury.
^ is sounded daw and is equivalent to d.
ditto. ditto, ditto, (rare)
^ This letter has a sound which is a mean
( 13 )
between the sound of t and d. To produce it
tiy to say t, but draw the tongiie away sharply
from the roof of the mouth and force the breath
a little.
s\
ditto. ditto. ditto, (rare)
U is sounded baw and is equivalent to b.
LI This letter has a sound which is a mix-
ture of § p and J b. To produce it try to say p,
but part the lips sharply and force the breath.
fl This letter has the sound of aw, it is
used sometimes as a consonant and sometimes as
a vowel. B can be written after a consonant,
the combination has the same sound as that of
the simple letter only, (\ff. m taw UB yaw.
The student must be very careful to dif-
ferentiate the sounds of i), ll and W or n , and
those of W, 9\ and Yl or S.
Exercise 6.
Read these Sounds.
m re ni n n fl f^ S fl m im In In In
sn s: SI s s s ^ s s IS iw l«j Is Is
t u
( 14 )
t n
r n
in.urihijuililftfliij
ihikihiJiiilililllliiJ
t n
gi ijr gi g g 8 y S ig
T U
iw Iw Iw Iw
iw Iw Tw 1r
lu lu lu lu
llJ llJ llj llJ
Special Points about the Letter b.
1. If the plain open sound of a vowel is
required, the consonant fl (silent) must be writ-
ten with the vowel in the usual place.
As it has been remarked above, the vowel
marks cannot stand alone, therefore to express
the sound ft um, etc., we must write Bi ffland so
forth.
2. The letter a { silent ) must always be
written after a consonant in combination with
the vowel a if no other consonant follows.
Example ^1, etc., in exercise 4 are not
strictly correct, they should be written pfQ tfl, etc.
For the sound of a alone we must write bb.
3. fl at the beginning of a word and not bear-
ing any vowel mark in combination with it, is
( 15 )
usually pronounced as short a, but in some words
as ^ort aw, or short o.
4. Double f) Q sometimes occurs at the be-
ginning of a word, it is pronounced as aw (long).
Exercise 7.
READ THESE SOUNDS.
(!)• fflfCBfl^^SS^felfl ILfllfl la Ifl
(2). feflflfe'fe^lB^feftefQfeifte
Words ending with jj u ^
Rule. — Syllables ending with the consonants
}j U 4 are pronounced as they would be
in English i. e. the final letter has its full
sound.
Examples, njj k6om fllli cham 1?^ rdng.
Exercise 8. (A)
READ THESE SOUNDS.
mjjpnupmmjj'muiTMSjjSu
2k mj vm VH ilu ilu fk usu
t t t
u^ u<N ^ h h ]}iu iJu iJ^
tl !) U
( 16 )
vliu vim iii] thi td di %] '^ "^
YTOJ Kitu im vu nu n] nu nu 419
t r T
fiiu tnu eiu gu gu a) iqjj itm iqj
The Unwritten vowel and the vowel »j
§
When two consonants stand alone together,
a short 'o* sound is understood between them.
This unwritten vowel sound is a peculiar
modification of the usual short sound of o and
can only be learnt from the teacher. Ex. 8 B (i)
The vowel ^ is used between two consonants.
It has a short sound which is a mean between
the sound of short a as in hat and the sound of
short u as in hm. Ex. 8 B (ii),
The letter fl can stand between two con-
sonants. It is then a semi-vowel and gives the
sound of aw (long) ; example TIBU tawn. Ex.
8 B (iii)
The letter 1 can stand between two other
consonants, in which case it is a semi-vowel and
fives the sound of 6o& ; example VflU tot'jSn.
X. 8 B (iv)
Exercise 8 (B)
READ THESE SOUNDS CAREFULLY, WITH
THE TEACHER.
<i) mi U4 PM S4 m Piu u^ PDJ iJu nu 7^ wi (N
<ii) ^ ^ «fu TM ^ « ^ ffti ^ Vii] ^ ffj ^ ft
( 17 )
(iii) nou iie» ntni ncDJ ubu nn vjb^ ufH sch uqu ijq3
ibinEHifiuncHiiCHiJeHSQUflf)) vm mniBi
(iv)mu im vnu mi tfm m ^ 'm ^rm ]m vfm ]hu
Final n } Qj it (1) are pronounced as u (n)
Examples. U^ boon rrv kam um bam.
Exercise 8 C.
READ THESE SOUNDS.
ni? mn moj iijQj ifin (TO m? aiJ iiin mqj Tm
ffifl im ug fh TiQj inoj
N. B. — Final ? after another consonant is
pronounced awn {see Chapter 23).
Chapter IV.
COMPOUND VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS.
By 'compound vowels' are meant vowels
which are composed of two or more simple vowel
characters which however form together only
one sound.
The mark ^ in the following example is
merely to indicate the position of the consonants.
. ( 18 )
U1 pronounced ow as in how ;imKhow, ifllow.
U* „ er as in her.
This vowel must always have a consonant
following e. g. ifiu Khem
There are several long vowels compounded
'Veith the vowel t. AU such compounds have a
very short sound with the breath sharply cut off.
I *r pronounced 6h' ire Kh6h'.
U+r „ a&h'iire Khiah'.
!♦: „ 6h' Ire Kh6h'.
UTS „ &wh' UTC Kh&wh*.
Exercise 9
Read These sounds.
on in mi iwi itn itn itn im iwi iti
iflu iii^ i^ ifoj ififl iilu r^ ifi^ lyju ilu
lu; ivc
IK
ire
ir
ire
irc
ir
is; lie
«iiic; lire
•
uik
lie
•
ll«C
imr
lire
lire
liar iiur
♦Iwrlifc
Ire
!«
,1C
lur
Ire
Ir
lijs Ire
*Lifcirrc
wx
irc
lur
im:
itrc
iim:
vsrt: iTt
Many Vowels in Siamese are combined with
the characters Q. U. ^. In such cases the char-
acters B. U. *J. partake of the nature of vowels
rather than that of consonants
* For the correct pronunciation of these syllables see
Chapter 8.
( 19 )
I. CombinatioDg with p only .
Utl pronounced as er in her; lira ter, ifiB er.
U fC as above, only very short,
L ♦Q no true English equivalent, but approxi-
mately something like 6ugh& ; lik m^ugh& (dis-
syllabic).
llJfC as above only very short.
The sound itfl can only be learnt from the
teacher.
Exercise 10.
READ THESE SOUNDS.
am in idq itm iw \m iiJq ibq i^
*LiJtt; ijfc lao; imc iflfc two; iik; lao; i«c
i^ its ih i^ i^ lpIq iDq IQfi lis
♦iftc LjfE ife; i^ ife; ife; ilk; i^ ife;
IL Combinations with tJ only.
, UO No English equivalent, but something
like the French eui in the word veuillez; [mu neui.
This sound can be learnt properly from the
teacher only.
l4tJ pronounced ^e& or eer as in beer (dis-
syllabic.)
( 20 )
l^ as above, but very short.
+'11 Has the long sound of i or as in aisle.
This combination gives a longer sound 1 or i
iru nai.
^ Has the sound of dol (disyllabic); flcj Idot.
^ Has the sound of oot (dissyllabic) ntJ lool.
h Has the sound of i somewhat similar to
1 orlflllf.
l4JHas the sound of 6hwi (dissyllabic), long
o ; vm d6hwl.
:i
Exercise IL
READ THESE SOUNDS.
Iflti UJU ISEJ llkj IPKJ Vkl l«J IQEJ IVl
i^ \Siii i%j iHu i^ i<lu iIej l^ i)e)
*its& i3)ec l^c like l^ l^ ilu; i^ i^
flXjjJTEJsioihjpTuiiiiEi^jfnti'm
fHEJ vIeJ «J fKJ !KI
t T T t t
^ 1P f P gu
nCJ KJ «J fiU %J
ItttJ llftJ IsO llJEJ TwEJ llkj l«j Ifltj l-jEi
^
V"
T
^
F
s^
1"
P
^
}]&
'^
iki
( 21 )
in. Combinations with Q only.
(final
X% as above but very short
♦Tl has the long sound of ow^ but longer
than Ul irn n6w.
7i has the short sound of ue as in cue or iw.
Ih nue-niw.
^ as above, but rather a longer sound ;
U Q no exact English equivalent but approxi-
mately &ew ; lUQ naew.
U^Q has the sound of aaow ; llUQ naaow
Exercise 12.
READ THESE SOUNDS.
♦rft; p& ite; w; & & i& f&
rrn mi urn mTBTiQUTiflm
f^ ^ h 'h "^ "^ t!f^ h
irn im ivn m i<n i« iin icn
urn \m iivn iin un ii« iiin uog
( 22 )
IV* Combinations of B. a % together .
■
4Slf has the sound of oy as in boy lifKJ noy.
+gLii has the sound of 6oweh dissyllabic ; UQCi
ndoweh.
t+ U % has the sound of 6e6 (dissyllabic) ; itltu
n6e6.
f+B£j, iio English equivalent but something
approximately like ^ughfeh (dissyllabic) ; ififlO
n^ugh^h.
Most of these sounds can only be learnt
properly from the teacher.
Exercise 13.
Read these Sounds.
UfiU!DQLIIiQU4B£JllfltJUQEJ{WEJMJ fifSJ
\hji i^ iilEfi ilu] iikn itim ikn irm ion.
itm l^EEJ l^ iIeKJ itloEJ l^ L^ ITQCJ l^
There are few other diphthongs which are of
extreme rarity, i. e., UBti 3j l+tC
The exercises in this and in the preceding 3
chapters should be gone over carefully several
times with the teacher. The student should
Ijiftve plenty of practice in writing the characters
also.
( 23 )
Chapter V.
THE TONES (INTRODUCTION).
In Siamese there are 5 distinct tones ; it is
absolutely essential that the student should be
able to recognise and to render them fairly ac-
curately if he wishes to make himself understood;
as the ' tone ' is an integral part of the word.
These tones are formed by altering the
pitch of the voice, and to a certain extent, by
prolongjgKQr.ahorteoing.tbe.so^^ com-
binatioidj of chs^acfers atrecfed.
It i^-a• matter ttf ^«y ^ise?it (^Sculty to re-
present^these tones on paper. \>
Thei following method has however been
found to he the most satisfactory, in actual prac-
tice. 1^6 student, must however diistinct-
ly l)ear in mind tliat the Tones can only
he properly learnt from the teiacher, and
by constantly hearing the spoken lang-
uage.
Nomenclature of Tones.
Various names have been used by different
writers to designate the Tones.
They agree however in calling the first tone,
the Conmion Tone.
The other tones have been designated as
follows.
I
( 24 )
i] The Rising, Question or Ascending Tone.
[ii) The Acute, Emphatic, or Circumflex Tone.
(iii) The Deep, Falling or Depressed Tone.
(iv) The Dropped, Low or Period Tone.
In this book the f oUowine:^ names have been
used. (I) Common. (II) fusing or Question,
(im Acute. (IV) Deep, or Falling. (V) Dropped,
or Low. Of the alternatives in 3.4 and o the
first names are to be preferred.
The relations of the Tones can best be un-
derstood from the following diagram.
THE TONE MODULATOR.
Tones
III
I
II
IV
Scale.
4 Sol.
3 Fa.
2 Mi.
1 Re.
Do.
-1 Si.
-2 La.
-3 Sol.
-4 Fa.
( 26 ;
The Arrow marked L indicates the commoi/
tone. It will be seen that it takes the central
line of the scale, numbenBd 0. (Do.) The studeijit
must take whatever note or tone of voice suiis
him best for his common tone and then derive
the other tones from it
The nmnbers 1 to 4 of the scale represent
somids of higher pitch than the starting point
(Common Tone)
The nmnbers -1 to -4 represent similar in-
tervals of lower pitch than tne Common Tone.
The lengths of the arrows are intended
to represent the differences in length of the
somia. Thus if the lens^th of Common Tone (D
be represented by three beats, the Acute III. and
Dropped V. Tones would be two beats, and the
Rising II. and the Deep IV. Tones would be four
beats. The heigiit of the arrows on the scale
represents the dmerences in pitch.
The Student should not try to learn all the
Tones at once. They should he taken one by one
in the order eiven and the student should refer
to the Modulator as he studies each tone.
A seperate copv of the modulator is included
with each copy oi tnis book so that the student
can have it before him as he learns the tones.
All Siamese words can be divided into two
classes as regards their tones
A. Words which end (i) in long vowels,
(ii) In the sound of N. M. or Ng.
B. Words which end (i) in short vowels,
(ii) In the sound of K. P. T.
( 26 )
The first class is dealt within chapters 6 and
7. The second class in chapter 8.
Chapter VL
THE HIGH CLASS CONSONANTS, RISING
AND ACUTE TONES.
The Rising Tone (2) is formed by raising
the voice graoualhr during the utterance of the
word. It starts nx)ma lower pitch than the
common Tone and finishes on a higher pitch
than the common Tone.
The Rising Tone is slightly longer than the
Ck)mtnon Tone.
The High Glass GonsonantB all bear
the rising tone, that is to say, all words begin-
ning with one of these consonants Qiust be i)ro-
nounced in the Rising or Question Tone of Voice.
N: B. — There are exceptions to this rule which
will be considered later, ( see Chapter 8.)
The High Glass consonants are 11 in number
but one of them is practically obsolete, and 3
others are but rarely used
The High Class Consonants. (Rising in-
tonation).
II equivalent to Kh. Khaw,
^ ditto. ditto, but is practically
( 27 )
obsolete, its place being taken by ^. in modem
Siamese^ ^ is still found in old books
t) equivalent to Ch. Chaw
U „ p. Paw
(1
f9
F. Paw
M „ H. Haw
H „ T. Taw
w „ S. Saw (saw law)
W „ S. „ (sawkhaw)
W „ S. „ (sawbaw)
ff
T. Taw
Letters marked with an asterisk * are of
rare occurrence in Siamese words.
The following exercise must be carefully
explained by the teacher, so that the student
may comprenend the difference between the com-
mon and the rising Tones.
( 28 )
Exercise 14.
Read the following Pairs of sounds
VERY CAREFULLY.
Common Rising Common Rising Common Rising
m
im
In
In
ivl
5n
fi
Ki
IIU
s
u
It.
un
Vfl
i
TIQU
PI
II
Is
lien
mi
m
vnu
ideH
i^
cm
ETM vm
la 1m
Note to Teacher&— Be most careful to
stop and correct the pupil every time he makes a
mistake in his tones. Neglect of this point wiU
induce a careless habit of not noticing the tones
sufficiently.
The teacher is also advised to exaggerate
the tones a little at first so as to make them
more distinct.
( 29 )
By trying to read in a sort of singsong
voice, the tone differences will be more readily
appreciated.
The student is now advised to procure a
copy of the First Siamese Reading Book ( lllJii
llciu m IfDJ vm which can be purchased any
where in Bangkok^ price 28 atts^ (12th edition)
and read carefully lessons 1—9 with the teacher.
He should not attempt lesson 10 until he has
mastered chapters. viL viiL ix. in this book.
The Tone Acxjents.
There are four accents used in Siamese to
indicate the various tones. These accents are
placed over the initial consonants of syllables.
The Tone Accents are.
1 I mai-&yk accent.
2 V mai-to accent.
3 ni leyk-chet accent.
4 ^ kftklt-b&t accent.
The first two (mai-iyk'& mai-to) can be used
with all consonants, but the third and fourth
(leyk-chet and kftkft-bftt) are used only with con-
sonants of the Middle class. /
It is very important now that the student
should be able to recognise >6ach consonant at
sight and should know at onbe to which class it
belongs. /
( 30 )
Also that he fully understands the difference
between the Common and the Rising Tones.
Hitherto no accents have been employed,
but we must now turn our attention to the tone
accents and their uses.
The Kakabat accent ^ is used only
with consonants of the Middle class, it
indicates that the Rising Tone must be
employed.
i
Fixercise 16.
■
Read the following pairs op sounds
VERY CAREFULLY.
omon Rising Common Rising Common Risii
m f^
luJ
Llll
i^ \jki
«
fin
^
ihii i^
1« "to
rm
ffe
^ A
1« Vi.
ira
Lf^
i^ i^
ifli tffi
«nu
431i
ihj ihtj
lU 111-
il^
l^
PT1Q ^
The Acute Tone.
To make the Acute tone raise the voice
sharply as in exclama j^ion.
( 31 )
The Acute Tone is much higher and sharper
in pitch than the common Tone, it is also con-
siderably shorter in length.
The Acute Tone is indicated by.
L The Mai-to accent v over a Low
Glass Consonant
H The Leykchet Accent ^ over a
Middle Class Consonant
The Acute Tone cannot be formed
with the High Class Consonants.
Exercise 16.
Read the following Pairs of Sounds
VERY Carefully.
Common Acute Common Acute Common Acute
■ in
m
ifi
i^
Ai
fi
f\
$!l
h
\ff\
ipj
111
117
vm
nl
6193
ira
-im
lUJ
ih
•
h
ih
ih
im
U1
ifi
iw
iflo
U7U
^ The student will find it useful to aid him in
fixing these tones in his mind, if he practises
readme these three tones coTisecutively, so as to
grasp uieir relative differences in pitch and length
as in the following exercise (17).
( 82 )
Exercise 17.
For practising the cadence Common, Rising,
Acute.
Read the following Sounds
very carefully.
. Common Rising Acute
m
m
m
!fil
efi
^
m
iQ
i^
^
h
h
In
In^
Ifi
1«
Vi
151
tm
mi
idu
ifiEJ
i&j
in
iitj
s
n
lOJ
eoj
ifo
i^
iIq
tfttn >fb Afl
( 38 )
Oliapter VII.
THE DEEP TONE AND THE DROPPED TONE.
The Deep Tone (4) is the lowest in pitch of
aU the tones. Its length is about the .same as
that of the Rising Tone.
To produce it, pitch the voice considerably
lower than for the Common Tone.
Tlie Deep Tone is indicated by the Mai
avk accent ov^ High or lUddle class
Consonants.
Exercise 18.
Read the following sounds very carefully.
Common Deep Rising Deep Rising Deep.
m
n
m
?
ml uii
no
5n
in
313
131
m
131
flu &i
vm m
t ti
m
m
( 34 )
The Dropped Tone.
The Dropped Tone is produced by dropping
the voice shaxply and uttering the sound nx>m
the chest, somewhat in the way in which the
voice is dropped at the end of a sentence. Hence
some writers call this Tone the "Period^' or 'Full
stop.' tone.
The Dropped Tone is shorter than the
Common Tone and'does not drop quite so low as
the Deep Tone.
The Dropped Tone is indicated by :-
I. The Mai-to Accent v over Higli or
Middle Consonants.
n. Tlie Mai-ayk Accent • over Low
Consonants.
Exercise 19.
Read these sounds very carefully.
Common Drop. Common Drop. Rising Drop.
m
I
m
1
tl
m
SI
Fl
m
PI
5n
VI
tl
8
tl
\ %
iih itii
i^ i^
( 85 )
REVISION OP THE FIVE TONES.
Exercise 20 (A).
HIGH CLASS CONSONANTS.
Rising Deep Dropped Rising Deep Dropped
vn
ID
law
m
vh
ifkj
lifu
V
m
vn
&
I
IfiQ
5mj
c/
ra
5nu
i
VTM
auj
h
va
\hii lim ihii
Exercise 20 (B)
LOW CLASS CONSONANTS
Common Drop. Acute Common Drop. Acute.
Tu lu' 1
m
m
m
1^
1^'
ir
lU
^
f
u
71
ti
in
01
u
i
U1
71
a
u
HI
( 86 )
PIU
IT)
In
fl X
mu
Hu
iri
In
V
mu
nu
ITI
I
in
'fe
pra
tm
UM
hi
no
lifN
}hi
no
V
j^
n
iroj
enu
Exercise 20 (C)
MIDDLE CLASS CONSONANTS.
Common Deep Dropped Acute Rising.
h
m
Is
UlJ
mu
SUi
iJflU
IfKJ
m
1/
m
fh
iri
l$l
Is
\%
1^
!l
9
fl
d
idj
ud
TifI
1$)
"W
mu
mu
ffiu
k^
STJJ
STJJ
lifDJ
IJedj
ikj
\m
l^
\&i
Is
ii
4tu
ibj
ik
( 37 )
Chapter VIIL
FINAL CONSONANTS, TONES OP WORDS
ENDING IN K. P. T. AND SHORT VOWELS.
There are only six different final consonant
sounds in Siamese.
These may be divided into two classes,
(i) Final M. N. Ng sounds which can take
all the tones.
(ii) Final K. P. T. and short vowel sounds
which do not follow the rules give above
in Chapters 6-7.
Rule 1. Words ending in the sound of
K. P. T. n. n. IJ. Ifl. S. etc. have the sound of the
final letter clipped short. Thus to pronounce
such a combination as vmn pftt\ do not let the
tongue drop from the roof oithe mouth as is
done in pronouncing final T. in English, um nak',
^ kheep'.
Rule 2. Final n 3 3 s or other letters
equivalent to d. ch. s. are pronounced as t.
clipped short. (Rulel) Examples, un meet ',
fflS khat* etc.
Rule 3. Final U N n B. or P. are pronounced
as iJ clipped. Example fil reepb\
Words ending with the sound of K. usually
have n as the final consonant.
Words ending with the sound of P. (iJ)
usually have ll as the final consonant.
Words ending with the sound of T» usually
1[iave v\ as the final consonant.
( 38 )
Words ending with the sound of K. P. T-
can never take any tone accents, with the
^ceptionof a few onomatopoeic words which
follow the ordinary rules see F. S. R; Leaaon 119
TONES OP WORDS ENDING IN K. P. T. WITH LONG
VOWELS OR DIPHTHONGS.
Rule L If the initial consonant belongs
either to the High or to the Middle Class we
tone is Deep.
Rule 11. If the Initial Consonant belongs
to the Low Class, the tone is the Dropp^
Tone. ««— _
Exercise 21.
Read the following sounds very carefully.
Long Vowels. Final K. sounds.
igh Class
Consonants.
Deep Tone
Rule I.
am snn tnn
^ ^ dn
\xm ii'on iiun
F 1" y"
Ian Iwi Im
ihn i^ itim
Middle Class
Consonants.
Deep Tone
Rule L
rrm sm wm
nn %i ^
iirm iisn \m\
I
rm sn wn
nut!
Innl-ffi Im
Low Class
Consonants.
Dropped Tone
Rule II.
rnn mn uTi
Pn tin ^
iipin linn iim
pm an
n
r
Ifln Itjn Inn
\hir\ i^ i!^
( 39 )
Final.
P. sounds.
MJ tnu vnu
nnj nnj fluj
pnij mu
tJIll
%i ttii h
fhj ^ ^
f^ $1J
du
U31J utnj iivoi
unu UTOJ ufu
upQj iimj
UUJ
F ^ ^
1311^^
^ F
IW
lau Iraj Ivfl]
Inu Irai Ian
IfllJ Iwi
Imj
i^ itim lib!
ifJEJu i^ i^ni
\hm i^
i!!l£nj
Final T. Sounds.
Tffi tnn thn
wi 9f\ Vff\
Trw ih« fns
iVi on ^
fTPi rra
nW JW
tin
uvi iisv) iKJn
urvi luJn iifvi
lUV) 11371
nun
l»i Imi 'bi
lyi ^ gj
livi liJn Ifm
IflW wW
un
u
Ivw
TONES OP WO
SHORT VO^/V
TUE SOI
RDS ENDING I
T^T.S OR ENDINi
JND OF A SHOR
OR DIPHTHON(
N K. p. T. WITH
S WITH THE
T VOWKT.
J.
Rule I. If the initial consonant belongs to
either the High or Middle class the
tone is Deep.
( 40 ;
Rule II. If the initial consonant belongs to
the Low class the tone is Acute, but
in these words the acute tone is natur-
ally not so strondy marked as it is in
other words which take the acute Tone *
N.B.— The short vowels are r «^ ^ a j and the un-
written vowel. The short diphthongs are
those compounded with r ^ a ,
All other vowels and diphthongs are long.
IT-v-ATVkiao OO
i
FtNA
iLK
. p. T. WITS SHORt VOWELS AND
FINAL SHORT VOWELS.
READ THESE SOUNDS.
as
9
i
(Rule I.) Deep Tone.
a VI ^ !!in !lin au
^ i^
On
ft
t
'% m wj !iu re tm
ij nw tiw nn ?in nu
fill ifte
%j
r
t
ic iJn .tin Pin Mn fw
an
PC
I
A
(Rule 11.) Acute Tone.
n wi Kw pm Mn fuj
h\ \hs.
tr\
K
t
2^ mi un un tin tin
ffli
T
* Some writers consider that these words have a tone
which differs from all the other tones thus constituting
a sixth Tone. It is more correct to regard these words
as taking the Acute Tone.
The Siamese grant the existance of five tones only
equivalent to n fl Tl D n
( 41 )
Chapter DC
V\lt\ (HAW NUM) AND RECAPITULAllON OPTONES.
The Rising Tone can be formed also with
Low Glass Consonants. This is done b^ placing
the Hi^ Consonant Vi is front of the initial Low
Class Consonant. The character VI is silent in
such cases and is equivalent merely to a Tone
Accent M used in this way is called VI U1 ' haw
num ' or leading^ h.
VI can only oe used for the purpose of form-
ing the Risine Tone before such Low Class
Consonants which have no equivalents in the
High Class.
That is to say, VI can only be used before
^. JJ. U. (m.) U. Qj. Q. J. R. (w.)
Thus VI in front of any of these letters makes
it virtually equal to a High Class letter.
Exercise 23 (A)
READ THE FOLLOWING SOUNDS.
m yd Iku mu urn <tA WEI
11^ ivXifi ivfiba Vim vi^ ym
LviuEJ ivldm vm Iviu iivnu % Ivoj
vdl ^ mH LwfetJ VKM VKW VWB
In addition to VI, the mai-ayk i and mai-to
%f accents may be used. As VI plus a Low Class
Ooilsonant is equivalent to a Hi^h Class Con;
nonant the tones given by the addition of mai-
\ 42 )
avk and mai-to to such a combination will follow
the rule for High Glass Consonants i.e.
van is pronounced with the Rising Tone.
ypjp „ „ Deep Tone.
y$X] ff " Dropped Tone.
Exercise 23 (B)
READ THE FOLLOWING SOXJNDS.
vuri vdh Imi lv4l i# .18 Mii
imi irni vidu vidu ivnb^ iv%u
ivhi iv&j v)(hi ivi^ \ym ivnj
Remember the rules for final K. P. T.
Therefore VDilfl and vw will be pronounced
with the Deep Tone.
Exercise 23 (C)
READ THE FOLLOWING SOUNDS.
vorm nd^ . mm ivi^ ivl^
vm iidbj uym Ivm 11^
vDVi VD£ idJn vi^ viKn
vm iivb; vam vSt] vAn
Note. — ^There are four common words which
have f] in front instead of n. Three of
them have the mai-ayk accent as well.
Therefore they take the deep tone :—
Oi to be or to live
wn do not (negative imperative).
WK sort, kind. The fourth word is fltTfl to
want
( 48 )
RECAPITULATION OP TONES.
The following^ table should be learnt by heart
as it is a short am convenient form of the rules
which govern the tones, ^ and shows the effect of
each accent on the different classes of consonants.
TABLE OF TONES- A.
For words not ending with the sound of K. p. T.
or with short vowels.
1
AccentR.
(Consonants.
High Class
Mid. Clam
Low Class
No Aoc^t
Rising
Common
Common
Mai-ayk i
Deep
Deep
Dropped
Mai-to V
Dropped
Dropped
Acute
Leyk-chetw
Acute
E&k&b&t >
Rising
M*
t
Rising
VI*
a
Deep
1
VI*
Dropped
( 44 )
TABLE OP TONES. B.
For words bearing no tone accents and ending
mih tiie sound of k. p. t. or with short vowels.
Initial Ck>nsonants
High
Middle
Low
Words ending in
K P. T. with Long
vowels or diphthongs
Deep
Deep
Dropped
Words ending in
K. P. T. with Short
vowels or endine with
short vowels only
Deep
Deep
Acute
Note.— The onomatopoeic words referred to on
page 38 are such words as
they take the Dropped Tone.
iln mn vm
There are also a few words beginnmg with
middle class letters and ending with E. P. t. or a
short vowel which take the leyk-chet ^ accent
and hence have the Acute Tone, e.g. nn SfW mn life
( 45
)
Exercise 24.
THE FIVE TONES.
Ck>minon
Rifling
Acute Deep
Dropped.
m
V)
h
HI
• 1/
m 5n
In
1b
1
T 1
in
In' IS
iin
ivnn
1/
ivnh
itii inu?
1^
vnli
h
will
u*i vnfi
1j
Iw
"a
Im
1: W
im
tJDU
NEIU
UDU
viDU im
ira
VU
^
9H
im «T^
mi
hi'
^
pfoi
^
idu
mi
1/
UM
luJu
TH
UM
(t
^
im
'SI
UTH
^
fh
i5n
IIVH
IKJ
UVH
\H
T
i5n
UQ
t
*
iiQ
whj Ijj
nOEJ
1"
1/
tn
VDhj
1^
Inu
Ik
fl
lifl
ITM
vm
lAn
l^
vra
( 46 )
The Student should now read carefully les-
sons 10-32 in the First Siamese Reading book.
He should not yet however try to translate any
of it until he has mastered chapters 11-18 of
this book.
It will be often found that the student, al-
though he can read his tones in a certain order
fairly accurately, yet when he tries to read those
same tones in a different order will fail to re-
produce them correctly. He is therefore recom-
mended to read the following exercise very care-
fully several times until he can produce any three
tones in any order.
This exercise contains all the possible per-
mutations of 5 tones taken in any order 3 at a
time.
It also forms a graduated reading exercise,
since the combinations of characters used in-
crease in complexity from Part I to Part V.
Note.— This Exercise may be omitted by those
who are able to make the tones fairly
accurately.
( 47 )
Exercise 26 A.
Part I.
(a) im m ig
im
m
?
tm
tn
IB
in
in
1
un
71
1
TB
(b)im
m
1?
m
tn
CI
itn
31
iin
th
f
XI
wn
tn
f
(c) im
m
Yl
Iffl
Iffl
im
n
m
in
u
CI
XI
u
u
XI
1
I
ti
(d)mi th
im tn
im
i^
iw vn
(e) ttn wi
iih
ivn m
im fi
im vh
Part II
(a) lai m
wn m
icji in
im m
ith tn
J
t
3
n
vn
lUJ
im
(b)m
vn
It.
Is
m
th
31
Ml
ffl
01
In
iivi
In
(c) ifli in 31
«i in
sn
if
a
(d) tn ui yn
vn tlh im
^
1/
31
w
tn
IIVI
1^
n
itn
ivn
1«
tn
R1
31
1/
tn
( 48 )
uu vn im
tn iyI ih
Part m.
(ft) ifi p m
un
jn
i$l In van
Id iffi in
(b)Si
fri m
wn j
TJ! Ill vrfb
UJ
(c) Iji 'B' *n
iij uh In
ii|t/ oil/ H.
in w m
V
in
im
1
im
(d)ijh m un
i m\
i
«n m m
ig wm y
Ml 9 vnn
(e) lui J In
uu vxn iiii
ir
iin
Ti
un 1J1
m vwi
9q
1/
mi
Part IV.
(a)(jiu itiu igu
fnu nu (hu
mu i&i Sru
von ithi iviOo
vlfe !^ Jb
(b)7N iflu il!b
aiu i^ inu
iu lib Jb
ri tra virw
II
nn ij
hi ^
mu
(c)niu i& J)cj
In la life
imivpa itlw
uu \h wm
(d) vnu Ing i^
irm mitHiib
mifDj miin
uuu nmu Im
(e) du & liu
wiu vnhilm
nu uIju lijo
Part V.
(a)!h)j tiu i!^
( 49 )
Tnui^ tin
lili rau son
aon itiEj fm
vb)nn i^ii^
dpi vnm i'^
rm vBJTtJ »fvi
(c)iw live n^
i^ iih
on sew
u
m
IIVJU
imi
u
t
on
VDJn
Wl
n
(d)lll¥l sm ifi^
UQlJVDJinVIEIlU
viui vm iiln
nxj nn luJ:
(e)m om i^
iflmtKi Ivru
iim jnn l«n
( 50 )
Chapter X.
Pronunciation op Double initial
CONSONANTS. THE REGAINING CHARACTERS
AND MARES USED IN SIAMESE. ANOMALIES
OP SIAMESE PRONUNCIATION.
Pronunciation of Double Initial Consonants.
Siamese words which have two initial con-
sonants fall into two classes.
(A) Words having either n ? Q 1. r. w. follow-
ing a consonant equivalent to E. or P. (and T,
very rarely.)
In such cases the two initial consonants are
pronounced together. Note in these cases the
tone accent is placed over the second consonant.
Examples. Wtn pll PlffiH klong yji) twee.
Wl khwft or quft,
Exercise 25 B.
Read these Words.
TKKH ikn iiuR fvm nru f^
mnfu ncTH nroj uJJIeju m iSin
nf(u Ifv n^ IiJn iv^ n2^
inns lutw iwns Ira iiJm Inm
Iw n!( pd^ ras iiJ^ mv\ viKn
( 51 )
(B) Words whose initial consonants are other
than theabove.In these cases(i)The first consonant
is sounded as if it were separated from^the second
consonant by the vowel z and thus the word be-
comes dissyllabic^ example Tivrv is pronounced
taliam just as if it had been written YmriT.
(ii) The initial consonant determines the tone
of the second syllable and any tone-accent over
the second consonant must be regarded as be-
longing to the first consonant, and as such
determining the tone of the second syllable.
Examples.
atfl (Kha'yum)
second
syllable Rising Tone.
3e/i
>♦
Deep „
nfil
})
Dropped „
lid (Cha'nee)
»>
• Ck>mmon „
ii "
)f
Dropped ,,
nB "
}f
Acute „
The position of the tone accent will often
show the pronunciation of this kind of word
where otherwise ambiguity might arise.
Examples. lUH chaang Common Tone.
IIW '' Dropped Tone.
But. uw cha'ngaa „ „
UIW Acute '^
( 52 )
Exercise 26 C.
Read these Words.
1
laui
alh
ran
%
fft
ij!
IPKJQ
UVIU
an
m
t
ItOJQ
«ri
imm
uaw
flUS
1^
emu
liiu
ayu
ifi^
tnu
aiiu
fOjU
atnti
limn
QKEJ
levKJ
tiuu
^u
For further examples of this, the student is
referred to the First Siamese Reading Book
lessons 33—38.
Other Characters and marks used in Siamese.
1 The Less common Low class consonants : —
n khaw, equivalent to kh^ this letter is
practically oDsolete, its place beuiff taken by n
with the one exception of the word RB. "neck**
1U khaw (kh)
fU naw (n)
UJ Chaw (ch)
•M taw (t)
law (1)
^ taw (t)
2. The signs for the numerals,
1234567890
The Siamese numerals are used in exactly
the same way as the ordinary Arabic numerals
e-^. 267— htol
( 53 )
3. The Four Sanskrit vowels.
There are four Sanskrit characters used in
Siamese, they partake of the nature of a vowel
and a consonant combined. They are not of
frequent occurrence.
r| equivalent to 7 reiigh or j ri
tJl „ Ifl reiigh
T| „ ^ leiigh
JJl „ «B leiigh
Note. — The character ly] is often used as being
equivalent to 1^ the sign of a question.
4. — The Accent d (Leyk-paat).
This Accent is placed over consonants. It
merelv shortens the sound of the syllable with-
out anecting its tone.
It should be noticed that when this'accent is
used in conjunction with the vowel l, the sound
of I (& as in same) is altered to that of short 3 (as
in pen), e. g. inu is pronounced 'hen' not *hane.'
Note.— The accent d is usually omitted from the
word LlJli (to be), but this word must always
be pronounced as if the accent d were
written there, e. g. iiJii = pen not pane.
( 54 )
5,— The mdrk c' (kiraiu)
When the mark c^ is placed over a consonant
or vowel, that consonant or vowel is not pro-
nounced, e.g. IJWJ (bodt.)
For a complete list of common words having
a silent tetter ^. iSe^ Chapter 23 of this book.
6.— The sign ^ means that the word or syllable
preceding it, is to be repeated, e.g. Ufsj ^ boi boi.
7. — ^The sign i is used chiefly in official docu-
ments and IvDval proclamations. It means ' and
so forth according to the recognised formula/'
This sign is used after the name riN ITIM =Bang-
kokthus nNlYlwnashort wayof writing flNim
NRajvnunr which is the full name of the City of
Bangkok, nm is equivalent to ''etc."
8.^The sign o shows the beginning of a
chapter or paragraph, The sign TC show the
end of a paragraph or chapter. The sign *TS>-
is equivalent to tne word ' finis ' at the end of a
booK. These signs are obsolete in modem
Siamese, but they are met with in old books
Modem Siamese has, to a great extent
adopted European punctuation.
Anomalies oj Siamese Pronuncidtion.
1. Initial W tr is pronounced like 5 (s) e. g.
yimJ is pronounced s&p as if written mil.
( 55 )
Z Initial RJ ( t'r ) should properly be pro.
nounced as written^ but it is vulgarly pronounced
as TO (kr), e.g. vtn is vulgarly pronounced kr&.
3. Double n is pronounced as if it were the
vowel «/ with u e.g. m is pronounced sun.
4 Final } preceded by another consonant is pro-
nounced awii, e. g. tfO la'kawn.
5. 1 ^recieded by fl or s at the beginning of
a word is usually silent in monosyllables, e. g.
tffOj is pronounced soi ( rqjj), %j is pronounced s4
Note. The common word Iw who? is often
vulgarly pronounced Ifl
6. Double lyni in a word. The first m is
pronounced as n, e. g. ^ujQjl suny&.
7. The initial s or t sounds of certain words
are very apt to be interchanged bv the common
people, e.g. tlUU (ta'non) ''road'^^is often pro-
nounced sa'non, and the word KMl ( sa'pftn )
"bridge " is often pronounced ta'pftn.
8. EJ after 1 is silent, e. g. ^ysj pronounced as
if written In
9. The short vowels - 1 when final and usually
with n (final also) are silent in words of Pali
derivation e. g. iwi pronounced 'hate' not h4t6o.
UtW pronounced chat not chfttt.
( 56 )
10. The word Wl t'doa is very eommonly pro-
nounced as t'6hw&.
11. R. sounds in Siamese words are habitually
pronounced as L. by Chinese and persons of
Chinese descent.
12. Very often L. is vulgarly omitted e. g. the
town Bang-pla-soi is often ^led Bang-pa-soi.
13. In words of two syllables or more, of Pali
and Sanskrit orinn (as a general rule), the final
consonant of all the i^llabTes before the last must
be fully sounded.
Example. iJnnui prat&nA njurrv Kromakam
iTIvn tayw&d&.
14. In words beginning with iff a short * o '
sound is understood after the U.
Example, uflou boriwayn.
The student should notice the Siamese order
of the consonants, as this order has been observ-
ed in the Vocabulary at the end of the book.
Qfl ufivilleifl
( -57 )
Exercise S6 D.
Read these Words.
uiflm iim onu- iJnniu ii%
trm uuim tlviqu t[]d ivni} mn ilm^vj
uin llijjqfi ihmu namj umfn ernmi
iJnflS^ mm ^ i^hns nmlm m^
iDTij KIN nrww ujwn Mium rml
wwi mm srmmW scrms ^ raitn
il^l^ ikan
r
mjiiki^
Chapter XI.
THE NUMERALS.
The Cardinal Numerals are :-
0. o
1 61
2 to
3 (n
4<i i
5d
7 cH
1^
vn
( 58 )
*N. B.—\J^ means one only.
8 d
9 ti
10 6K)
11 6)51
12 eto
13 6Kn
14 6)d
15 e&
16 sh
17 set
18 6lci
19 6)^
20 too
21 kDS)
22 talD
30 (no
40 do
50 do
60 bo
70 do
UlJn
im
flu
Sutnu
Ihjvin
thiiuJn
Huirti
vmfhj
80
90
100
101
102
200
300
1000
1001
2000
10000
100000
do luJnSu
6no nmviw
6K36I IfKJ IfVI
seta nKJ MH etc*
inoo maifsi
cnoo froJTEKletc.
(3000 YilJvlfh
61006)
ffljion
taooo tmiHi
6)0000
vitluyid;
6)ooooo lUlU VIU)
vift;
1,000000 aoooooo (nuvi(b
10,000,000 6)0.000.000 Inj)
( 59 )
The Ordinals are formed by prefixing ft to
th6 Cardinals 0. g. ft nd^ first fl WA second.
TAtf Numeral Adverbs are formed from the
Cardinals by tiie addition of tiie words« VlUor fi
e.g. VIU l^ or viu Vlfk once, (KH HU orflcHTI twice.
■^0^. (i) WA and i^ are usually placed last
in the sentence, (ii) vm fl Vltk= The first time.
The words iiU or n are usedof separate occasions
as in the sentence vh U flQ4 VIU> Do this twice
In such expressions as ' twice as large ' the
wordivh is used instead of yiu> example u lViq|
rm UU fl£H irh. This is twice as large as that
The Distributives are formed with the word
(C Example in the sentence "give these men
three ticaUeaeh" the latter part would be expressed
by piu nr {nu invi
Fractions Half is expressed by the word
pA or fb. Note. f^O mi half a yard m\ m
a yard and a half. Other fractions are expressed
by sudi phrases as ^ mu iflimu VIU4 lit. "four
parts, take one " so I or more briefly VIU4 mu n
( 60 )
Decimal Fractions are called ifW 3lJ. Thus
*35 would be im Hu, em vh.
Vidgar Fractions are called l(TO WW. Thus f
The following Pali numerals are sometimes
used.
one
ion
five ilgss
nine UVC
two
1^
six QB
ten vk;
three
p^
seven ^
eleven ion tk;
•
four
%i
eight ^
twelve rmffe
Chapter XII.
THE SIMPLE SENTENCE(INTRODUCTORY)
The following rules should be carefully noticed.
1. There are no grammatical inflections of
an^r kind in Siamese : the individual words re-
main the same always.
2. There is no definite article 'the' in Siamese,
but its place is taken by the words u this, these
and UU that, those.
3. The verb ilJu ' to be ' is usually omitted
( 61 )
in many cases in which it would be used in
English.
It is always omitted when used with a
Predicative adjective, e.g. This horse is black
JJlSfrl, lit. '"horsethis black'' but the verb LlJli
must always be used with a Noun complement^
or a predicative adjective used as a Noun e.g.
He is a soldier lai llJu YllTff.
4. The verb ' to be ' used in the sense of
* to Hve/ or ' to be situated ' is translated by fitj
Siamese (not llkl). e.g. ''That book is on the
table." viuafe UU ay imljfe. Lit. Book that is on
table.
5. The verb S) * to have ' can be used im-
personally to mean 'there is or there are' in
which cases the verb S) stands first in the sen-
tence (cf. French il y a).
Examples iSH.^"?^ I. ^*^^^^^^^-
I S) Ul 0^ n UU Therearehorsesthere
6. The subject comes before the verb and
the object follows the verb except in certain re-
lative sentences^ just as in English.
( 62 )
Tr^««.r»i^ I fiii iJ IJTU I have a house.
£ixamples ■{ v a ^ a <d
' in ft im a isu The horse which I
have is ill.
7. The Negative UJ (not) always comes be-
fore the verb, but in cases where the auxiliary
verb % (can) is used, the negative UJ is placed
before the auxiliary «.i7. Ul Ul (cannot).
„„ ^, j ^ lil ivlu V\ I do not see horses.
liiXainples •< ^ ,^ v vi,\i{u
( «U IMU Jil W W I cannot seehorses.
8. Adjectives always come after the Nouns
which they qualify, e.g. jjilfrl black horses; jh
^KM 'diU my horses ; V\ u this horse. But if a
possessive or a demonstrative adjective e.g. my,
your, this, those etc, is used to|^ether with an
adjective of quaUty, the possessive or demon-
strative adjective must follow the adjective of
quality.
UlrtlUfH^ My black horses, lit.
Horses black my.
ih rtl ifu Those black horses.
lithorses black those
But note jri & Wl Those horses are black.
If these three kinds of adjectives are used
togeth^ the demonstrative adjective takes pre-
cedence of the possessive adjective only.
Examples.
( 68 )
9. Questions can be f onned by adding the
word vifti sometimes written ij] to the end of a
s^tence thus.
rnu t viik^ You have books.
, ^ Have you books ?
Trm limm m
10. In questions introduced by interrogative
adverbs, Where? Why? When? How much?
Howmany ! etc. the order of the words in the
Siamese sentence is usually the reverse of the
order in the corresponding English sentence.
Examples. (1) Where is your new book ?
Lit. Book new yours is where.
(2) When will you go
TfhuSsTlJLMj -
lit. You will go when ?
(3) How much money havie you ?
Lit You have money how much ?
Note.— The word vtffl or t]] is not used in ques-
tions introduced by interrogative adverbs.
11. Pronouns are not used elliptically in
Siamese, as a rule the noun has to be repeated.
.eg. ' * My book is large, but yours is small "
is translated as if it were '^My book is large but
your book is small.
( 64 )
Vocabulary L
READ AND LEABN THESE WORDS.
U this, tiiese
UU
•^
mu
in
inu
m
i(fn
iin
im
that, those
you
lan he, she, they
we
IjJ to go
house, home
horse
vni^ book
new
large
small
but
and
m
MM & my mine
aw ynu your yours
lynlj
i^
W1
iim
irn
n
LVIU
his hers its
their
ours
where
How much
money, silver
to have (there
is there are)
black
red
stone
green
white
snake
to see
to look at
( 65 )
Exercise 26.
Read and Translate into English.
3 viM) 3tH %j i!$n 4 171 d In am
6 iniviuilUuu 6 viMiaB3^t|ifll)iu
7 !iiinviq)iiFiiriuuimi 8 indi^irnbp
10 fliiliJinu 12 rrhi ifiu ^ um tyi
13 in fi in rii iin 4 inn 14 i) i^ lu inu atM in
15 inlvi^jKM^Dti^lviu 16 mliJ inu'lviq)
Exercise 27.
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1. This stone is green. 2. We have horses.
3. This snake is small 4. They have money.
5. We go home. 6. My new horse is black.
7. How mudi money have they ? 8. Our books
(66 )
are black. 9. Where is your book? 10. Where
is my red book ? 11. This snake is small and
that snake is large. 12. Those books are large.
13. Have you a white horse ? 14. I see tEat
white horse. 15. He has a green snake. 16. My
horse is white but yours is black.
Note to the Student :
. The exercises from English to Siamese
should be done first oraUv with the teacher, and
then written out in a book for him to correct.
Note to the Teacher :
The sentences in the above exercise are not
at all idiomatic ; for example, the designatory
particles have been omitted lor the simple reason
that they will be learnt in the next chapter. This
exercise (27) should be re-translated aitex hav-
ing done exercises 28 and 29. This has been
done intentionally in order not to introduce the
student to too many difficulties at once.
Chapter XIII.
THE NOUN,
Like all other parts of speech in Siamese,
the Noun is invariable as regards the inflec-
tions of Number, Gender, and Case. '
NUMBER. To form the Plural of nouns :
(1) The word ^vmu' (many) is used with
the noun repeated, or with the desigiiatory
(67 )
particle { v. it^f. ) e. g. "ifi ntnu V\" Horses, lit.
Horse many horses.
(2) The plural can also be expressed by
such phrases as (1) '' \m\ 9, \m\ l£, " this lot
that lot (2) "wn" company, or *unm' tribe.
Examples
1^ IVKfi i! These horses.
IJIwn Jri The horse tribe.
When the Singular is required nw or l^
(one) is used. e. g. ]Ji in l^ one horse.
GE2NDER, of persons is shown by the
words (f mtJ (man) for the masculine, and
cfviffl^ (woman) for the feminine.
Examples
iwn child.
IWI tTaiEJ boy.
IWItTvi^^ girl.
The sex of animals is shown by the words
^ cf for the male, and pS lib for the female.
Examples
(68 )
in horse (generally speaking.)
v\f^ cT stallion.
n
)f) rij lilejmare.
Exception va elephant
V14 VKTEl bull elephant.
VN W cow elephant.
Note VH ifion white elephant
The young of animals is shown by the wordtm.
gn vn foal
nnjhJnti colt
u u
Examples
nn JJ1 wj ijIej filly
CASE.— ThePossessive case in shown by the
word BM (of).
Example vm acH Ih. The horse's tail.
The word im is sometimes used as a sign of
the Dative case.
Example ji«ni1li Jnll^imfe.
[ Give me the money.
■H
(69 )
The word un however is maite oommonly
omitted.
Classes of Noim&
1. Simple Nouiu. Composed of one word
only.
Example. ui water, wi breast, 1^ heart.
2. Compound or Derivative Nouns. V^y
man^ Siamese nomis are formed by the juxta-
position of two Simple nomis.
Examples
JU milk, lit
breast
Uim tears, lit.
in M will, intentions, lit. water
of the heart.
There are many nouns compounded with such
words as !ji water, nn child, nf) father, im mother^
etc Note the following.
NQfld^ cook, lit. father (of the) kitchen.
^*Bj fruit, lit. child (of the) tree.
' m uu cartridge, lit child (of the) gun.
tV) in sailors, lit. children (of the) ship.
( 70 )
lUJlfl river, lit. mother (of ) water.
lUJ ivm magnet lit mother (of) iron.
The student will doubtless notice manv more
compound nouns of this type by glancing tnrough
the Siamese English Dictionary.
3, Verbal Nouns. Nouns can be formed
from yearbs by the addition of the word mi (work).
Example, l^ llJ to walk, mi l^ 111 walking.
Many nouns equivalent to English nouns
ending in-or and-er denoting the doer or maker,
(agent), are formed in Siamese as follows.
Ib to buy, U 5o purchaser, lit the person
" buying.
lUU ifc to sew,TWltilJlTOl tailor, lit an workman
to sew clothes.
ISI to hire, tj JlJ 151 tenant, lit. the person who
receives the hire.
l^ .. ulvi 171 landlord, lit the pei^n
" who allows the hire.
Note. PnillldldtJ bachelor, lit. man no hav^
wife.
4. Abstract Nouns. Can be formed from
adjectives and verbs b;y the addition of the word
nQIU, whidh is equivalent . to the English
suffix, '*ness.''
( 71 )
Examples
rt good, fmu ^ goodness,
rift to fear, pmu rifo fright.
JBuls anxious, mTJJJQuls anxiety*
Abstract nouns are used as little as possible
in Siamese, as the Siamese idiom favours the
concrete rather than the abstract.
Names of the races of mankind are alwavs
accompanied by the word Piu person or Tfi people.
Examples
Man, m^Ttl.
A Chinaman,^ flU Vlifeor nu isn.
The Burmese, STJ mh.
Specific names of different kinds of birds,
fishes, fruits, flowers, trees, snakes, etc. are
always preceded by the generic word for
bird, fruity etc.
Examples
un
bird.
un rarson sparrow,
undlira eagle."
Exceptions In hen, iljn duck, vhu goose.
( 72 )
Tbe Designatory Particles.
The use of the designatory particles, (piece
words ) is an important, Siamese idiom. Theae
words are used with every concrete Noun in
Siamese.
For example^ the Siamese alwajns say
^'horses three ammals/' where in English we
simply say *' three horses/' ''Boys two persoQs/'
for ''^two boys," ''Cup, one round thmg,'* for
" a cup,'' and so forth*
There are a great many of these designatory
particles, which are used for different cli^ses of
objects.
It is very important for the student to learn
the more common of these designatory particles,
and to clearly remember for what classes of
objects each one is used, as it sounds ludicrous
in Siamese when these particles are misused ;
for instance, in talking of knives or pointed ob-
jects^ to use the designatorjr particles which is
applied to hollow or round objects, or vice versa.
The following is a list of the more common
designatory particles which should he learnt
car^ully.
1. oy for persons only.
a man, PIU ^ VCi oy Vlfk
Examples
ei V
three boys, l«n y TKJ «TW gy
girls (plural), IWl |i m||3 VWU QU
( 78 )
2. ^ for' all kinds of aniihals and living
creatures, exoept the elephant, j
Also for chairs, tables, coats, trousers, shirts^
piens and dgars.
JjflffiH^ two horses.
% ^ Vifb a table.
Examples
3. Ill for round and hollow objects, e.g:—
bottles, plates, fruit, hats, pillows,
and lamps, (unlighted).
Example HVliullJ. ten bottles.
4. J^ for thin, flat, or pointed objects e.g.
books, knives, forks, pins, needles
and nails.
• i
Example tbllvi^ inu vifb a large knife
5. lUQ for small objects, such as grains of
sand, seeds, pills, or precious stones.
Example iiniT enu lun three diamonds.
«
& QflU for lumps or pieces of anything.
Example ui mn flCN fiem two lumps of sugar.
7. ]^ for things generally, not specially
. cflassifiea
( 74 )
A safe guide to the beginner is ^'when in
doubty toy dil'' but never use dil for persons or
animals.
The following designatory particles are used
for the special objects mention^.
The Student is advised to learn these
gradually.
8. fi£ for Kings, Princes, and images of
Buddha.
9. ?ll M Buddhist priests.
0. ifiU ff ropes, strings, threads, wire,
1. nu ., trees, posts, columns.
2. l^ „ elephants.
3* won „ flowers, fireworks, and keys.
4. ril ,, boats, ships, & logs of timber
5. 9m ,., stars, lights, lighted lamps.
6. ffu ,, vehicles and umbrellas.
7. viK4 „ buildings.
8. flXJ ,) tramway and railway lines, chains
or bracelets.
9. « M ring shaped objects, military
bands, and orchesfaras.
( 75 )
2(X iiuu ;, &t objects such as sheets of
paper, or iron.
2L du ,, ilatpiecesof cloth of a definite
size and shape such as panungs.
handkerchi^s, table cloliis, oea
sheets^ and napkins.
22. ^ ,, piece goods.
23. fln M fruits and balls.
24. un „ fruits (High word).
25. ^ ,, documents and manuscripts.
vilkfc RCH iroj two books.
Note.
viu«B «fH m\ two letters.
26. ncuon yy guns, tubes, water pipes.
27. l!bi „ clocks and watches.
28. PI „ pairs.
Example 7CH irh {KH n Two pairs of shoes.
29. tlu ,, tins of kerosene oil.
80. VIO „ parcels, bundles, packets.
31. lukH „ eggs (High word).
( 76 )
,32. itffa.t, sets of things, suits of dot^MBk
33.. inu ,, windows and doors.
•84. ft „ teeth.
35. ^ ,, bones, ribs*
36. IITH n pencils.
37. Jim jy rolls of paper or doth.
There are several others, but they are of
extreme rarity.
Very often the noun itself can be repeated
as a designatory particle.
Example. UIU flCH Uiu '' Two houses/' can be
usedinstead of the strictly correct, !j1U0HHVi^.
Vocabulary 2,
READ AND LEARN THESE WORDS BEING
CAREFUL TO REMEMBER THE DESIGNATORY
PARTICLE IN THE CASE OP EACH NOtJN.
lOJO cat
% table
iff) fl chair
Sn
knife
lifiu
fork
3QU
spoon
vaha
lamp
( n )
\^ cigar
1]u
gun
tt^lll matches
ifcw
door
inmn sugar
liiFm
window
l^ boat, ship
le
to buy
iftlifl steamship
mo
to sell
7(1 carriage
vn .
to look for
nu^mu man
UEK^
to stare at
nu It Vl^ women
wwrru
to want
iJh very
omn*U
1 to want
7(1 VA tramway,tramcar fi%j
beautiful (persons)
7(1 111 railway, train
^
beautiful (things)
m tfl electric light
7U
umbrella
ihnmpen
miTn
•
walking stick
Exercise 28.
Read and Translate into English.
1 ^ KH ^ fly i\m
2 {iuircjiniihM
( 78 )
3
D
4
ifi^rrv nieiEHAu
5
iiuliidiibenufri
6
liJ vn ion ^ rtiiKH ^
7
8
9
«.ar.,lKtufliiin«.Kk
10
ih fTM irm Slngi liH
11
i[| ^ mtj .nu £j im d dn ifoj vith
12
|ivi|4{<rDjroiuudilinTripninrfleH^
13
yhu jnjfelviqj ifia ntf^ if
14 131 nCH rro IIBU {KH IflU
15 m$f)l3ullnnJon
16 ^ aril!! i« 111 w« via
17 igiftili<*ilv4)uu
18 |i ii||9 cnu nu {tlij ffiEJ Oh
19 liJleiifDJifhifiuunnrii'iu^liJviih
20 UV^UfH^VIBUUfKl'luTtlllfHYriU
( 79 )
Exercise 20.
Translate into Siamese.
1 I have a large table.
2 He has a small cat.
3 We have two chairs.
4 You have three spoons.
5 I see a beautiful cat.
6 We see five steamships.
7 Look at those three men%
8 We buy sugar.
9 I want a cupboard.
10 We want eight cigars.
11 Where are the matches.
12 Do you want a carriage.
13 That girl is not beautiful.
14 Go and look for those two pens.
16 My gun is in that cupboard.
16 He sells knives and forks.
17 I want to buy three horses.
18 They want to sell their carriage.
19 Those two men have no matches*
20 We want four lamps.
( 80 )
Chapter XIV
The Verb.
The verb in . Siamese has no inflections for
person, numbw, tense, mood or voice.
Person and numb^ are expressed by the pro-
noun (if used).
Tenses are expressed by certain words which
are added to t^e verb.
Example l^ "to write,"
Present Tense ^ l^ I write.
Continuous Present ^ ft)^ l^ flii I am
writing^
Future Tense ^ SS l^ I shall or will write.
Preterite Tense liii Wl^ I wrote.
Perfect Tense 'Sd \.%J\l ItfW I have written.
The Imperfect may be thus expressed UJOllii
rh^ l^ f|l I was writing.
The JPluperJeet may be thus expressed,
ifJB ^ Vi!Seju IIW I had ivritten.
The ImperaHve is expressed by usin^ the
simple verb word often followed by such mter-
jections as ifin. 3.
!h ikm ifin shut the door.
Examples
in u f comie here.
( 81 )
Auwiliary rei^bs.—Jji addition to the words
above menticmed, there are certain important
auxiliaries viz :—
Can is e^ressed by m after the verb
word.
Example ^ llJ 1n^ I can go.
N.B. Distinguish carefully between,
BtlllJ V I can go.
fliiWTlJ I went (Preterite Tense.)
Must is expressed by pIeh e.g. f{u 9tBi\3\
I must go.
Ought to is. expressed by the words (TO s:
e.g. ^ m SsllJ I ought to go. "rili fW s: V lli
I ought to have gone
Map, Might (Subjunctive) is expressed by
the word 111 at the beginning of a sentence.
e. g.m^isl *'May I go or let me go/'
In polite speech the word af) would be added
e.g. mlvimillJ '* Please let me go.'*
The word m has the following idiomatic
uses,
( 82 )
-1.-' In such a sentence as 'Tell him to go'
l^e Siamese idiom is "Tell him let hhn go;''
iiBnim
l«TiJ.
2. ivi sometimes means to order or to
inaketodo, as ^lUsrlwyhuTliinu "I will
make you go home."
■
3. In combination with the words ifn . . ill, Ivi
means " to give. '*
Ifn ffl WW Jn Ivi ^ " Give me the sugar."
■
The Passive Voice can be very rarely ex-
pressed in Siamese, the active voice is almost
always used, but there are a few phrases in
which the word rm occurs, which have a passive
siense, «. g. iKl tn l<icJU llfn "I have been beaten."
11
Here the word rm gives the passive meaning in
the sense of I haye caught or attained to a
feeating, (tm properly means to touch. )
Rule for Tramlation. — Sentences in English
in which the passive voice is used, should always
be chan^ so as to use the active voice before
translatmg them into Siamese.
( 8» )
The verb uhi 'to be' is usually omitted where
it would be employed in Engish, e.g^ ;H ri!$ QlfH l£
''this is my horse, " lit." horse animal this mine."
The Siamese never say Ul ^ 9 ilJu 304 1& The
verb llJu is retained in such sentences as
^llJupm#lt]U " I am an Englishman," where
it is used with a noun, or an adjective equivalent
to a noun. It is^ omitted when used with a
Predicative adjective.
e.g. tilJ l^ " I am ill," never iJli llhi ISU.
When a specific disease is mentioned, the
Siamese say llhj (to be), whereas the verb "to
have " is always used in English in such cases.
e.g. ^llJuV"! have fever," lit. "I am
fever."
r
In sentences where the verb ' to be ' is used
in the sense of to live or to be situated, the
Siamese use the verb m instead of lljll.
^. f7. WUwteatM^fiy^lviU ''where is my
bookr
thu ay' ^IviU "where do you live." lit.
you is where ? ...
( 84 )
The verb t (to have) is used impersonally at
the b^fiiuung of a sentence to mean 'th^:« is'
or * there are.'
e. g. ti ralj^ 0^ \S^ {«H \m. There are two
books on that table.
Compound Fiwft*.— Many verbs in Siamese
are compounded of two or more separate words
which do not necessarily follow one another in
the sentence. The following common verbe are
of this nature. The student should learn them
car^ully and notice that the object is placed
between the component parts.
1. ifn in to bring.
«.g. IfnuWJfl " bring the cigars."
2. len, in liT to give.
«^. ifn uw in W "sfii * * give me the cigars. "
3. lfn......lQ'ortfn !ra to put down.
e.g. Ifn urn l<riJU% '* put the cigars down
on the table."
4. Ifn .ilJtotake.
e,g. Ifn um ilJ fl inu " take the cigars
home."
6. Ifn llJ l^ to take away.
(85 )
e.g. ifniflrfimiifllJlfe " take these cigars
away."
^' ^ -J^lTosend.
pJm .Ill)
e.g. «« MM intfl iilll uiu " sendthese things
home."
7. iffl tfl to put.
e.g. ifflUjilRlutfej "put the cigars in
the box."
8. ifiu y^ to collect or put away.
e.g. lflllvn^lVltfl9Vlu^ ''put these
books away in the cupboard."
9. i«n Wto distribute, to give out
e.g. ifn VIU^ IVKf) if 111 171 PIU (C; MN itiu
"give them each two of these books."
10. iflTl Son to take out,
'e.g. tfP vm"^ ivitn 8 flon srm Vlu '^take'.these
books out of the box."
In other cases the component words of the
^«rb are not separated, 6.g. iehW * to cry,' «M llJ
* to fall down.'
e.g. flth TEmWi^ W " do not cry loudly,"
ifi will i Ru " the water falls to the
ground."
(86 )
There (ure certain words which can be added
to verbs to give a different shade of meaning.
A few common examples are subjoined.
l^ gives the idea of 'thoroughness, completion. ^
fW gives the idea of * down, ' or ' dedreasing in
strength. '
ili gives the idea of ' up, ' or ' increasing in
strength. '
1^ gives the idea of fixity, stability.
iflU gives the idea of aimlessness, pleasure.
171 gives the idea of motion into.
f)On gives the idea of motion out.
S4 indicates a polite imperative.
fa is used with the future tense to give em-
phasis.
Verbs of speaking, thinking, calling and
hoping take the word 71 ( to say ) after them.
e.g. ^^7\l^i'hl\il^M'Sll I think
that this is not my table.
Most verbs of motion from are often com-
pounded with the verb llJ ( to go ) and verbs of
motion towards are compounded with the v^l>
in ( to come )
Note i.— The idiomatic use of Til jji used to-
gether to give a perfect tense meaning.
r «7 )
«.^. tfluTlliVIUJJI **where have you beenf*
lit "you gp where come"
Note il— UJ llJu is often used instead of
1)i W ( cannot ) of bodily actions.
e^g. ^ 7U ifilli llJu "I cannot swim", is
often said instead of ^ 7U if) 111 V
Vocabulary 3.
READ Alfl)
LEARN THESE WORDS.
lAuliJ
to walk
to sit
^U
to run
to stand
TltJlfi
to swim
ntW
to fear
6b
to hold, to carry
m
• •
to help
§
iluu
toIeaiTi
m
to play
«Em
to teach
,
HQli
to like
tjniu
to rise
^
to beat
UfiU
to sleep,
down
to lie
rh
to do, to make
HM
to think
tnjj
to ask
T
toq)eak
PIQU
to answer
itEjn
to call
i^ls
to understand
( 88 ;
Exercise 30.
Read and Translate into Enoli^
2. miWuTilifiu
3. 131 «c ihTiJ iJiu
4. 171 % %i dn Ihj inu
5. in «c mown
6. TPU ss rfw TTO mw ifl imj
7. muWaujJiMaifhuitfa
8.'W^i9luliJinu
10. ifnjftiflfwraajBnSlQ'lugi'
11 iffi irfSi jn Vvd f^ vllk
12. ifii Witun nu u6 Win
13. lenviul^lnuiiliJi^
14. lai miu ifou sffiH imj S
15. iniMuulJfeiuft
16. iffi TO :Ji p( ui enji rfli
( 89 )
Exercise 3L
TRANSIATE INTO SIAMESE.
1. We will go home.
2. Bring me tiiree chairs.
3. Give him a pen.
4. Put the table in the house.
5. They will sleep on the table.
6. He cannot swim.
7. They have run home.
8. I bought a horse.
9. You must sell your horse.
10. Let me go to sleep.
11. Put those books on the chair.
12. He will buy four tables.
13. He sat in that chair.
14 I helped him.
15. Where did you see me ?
16. Where have they been ?
Exercise 32.
Read and Translate into English.
1. mVyhw'RTJj'luLmviuvinlu
2. ^ fiw iri i2n s:*bi in inu 8
(90 )
6. ^ fhu vn!^ iHu 9 (nu viu lu^
6. inWifanWihuMivientJvruiuS uwidTu
inuTrmin
Exercise 33.
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1. He says that we shall have six knives.
2. We think that he has seen us.
3. They made four chairs and two tables.
4. I am holding a pen and a spoon.
6. Do you want a black horse ?
6. They will call a carriage for us. .
Chapter XV.
THE ADJECTIVE.
Adjectives in Siamese follow the noun
which the|^ qualify, but there are a few ad-
jective of rab origm which precede the noun.
e.g. ijvn great .
(91 )
Adjectives may be :—
1. Simple, e.g. ^ good, cfl black.
2. Double, e.g. v\ flJ savage. U' m stupid.
T
3. Dmmft't?^?.— Derivative adjectives may be
formed from nouns and verbs by means
of such words as n and W ' which ^
dii 'thing' in 'face' or front
e.g. i ih lovable, i^fhi eatable, ill ntfi
fearful. fnJmV^ remaining.
Some adjectives are formed with the phrase
\uf (do not know.)
n
e.g.^]30l(ivnu 'eternal/ lit. do not know
day to die.
Note these three phrases : —
llhj mi um plentiful, many.
llJudliaYI absolutely.
llhi m chiefly, important
Possessive Adjectives. — These are formed by addr
ing the word BfM (of or belonging to) to pronouns-
e.ff. Wi I. afM mi my, mine.
(92 )
Note.— When a poBsessive adjective is used
with another adjective, the possessive adjective
comes last
e.g. jxi ^ ffiH ffii m^ black horse.
Demonstrative Adjectives mei —
9 this, these, iK that, those. lliU that
thosevonder.
There is no definite article 'the' in Siamese,
but its place is taken by the demonstrative ad*
jectives xi and UU.
Comparison of Adjectives. — The comparative
d^;ree is formed by adding riTI to the ppsitive.
^,9* ^ gfiod. ^ nfl better.
The superlative degree is usually formed by
adding the words n CVI. to the positive.
e,g. rt good ^ rrfl better. ^ ft Wl best
There are various other words which may
be used to form the superlative d^ree, e.g. vrs\
or un * very.' ^ Jjm or ^ lift very good.
^ l^ and \y^ ifhi are strong forms.
^ fivkn excellent, ^ ivlfelfhi exceedingly good.
A superlative meaning is given to adjectives
by repeating, them thus, ^ A usually written
%*y ' very good.' TW •] ' very beautiful'
Cf. lllT*] 'very' e.g. ill B?i UU IIW lirT^^
that horse is very dear.
( 98 )
Yocabulary 4.
READ AND LEARN THESE WORDS.
trn
long
mi
•
cool
ifi
short
vnm
cold
f
taU
m
fresh
Aj
abort (of persons)
ki
unripe
^Is
happy
n\
sharp
Isdi
good-natured
m
blunt, stupid.
i!^l«
i sad
hard
jnn
many
mx
soft
liui
new
\
large
im
old, of things
vnlu
young
uri
old, of persons
at
l^
ill
A
quick
ennu
well, healthy
*
slow
ri^
loud
ft;
nm
hot
iluj
quiet
im
at all
1^9
to-morrow
( 94 )
EzOTCise 34.
Read and Translate into English.
1. IliAmnw]
4. ife «« th 8 im rm ife WM Yriu
5. lu ife ^ ini Si yi ifti w«j Piu
7. . in "vlil ife ftilvtti tm rasufm
a miirniSiirnuTi']
10, in ^Is 5l!**t in Til i31j Ihj inri
11, •aiiiirimiyriu
12, inu i!in KM Tfriu B^ ftlviu
la imviwj TTJi in
14 luiiifri aw iiriBy fi ti
(96 )
16. jJnlwqjnriujnvitritiiTh
17. ^dlUfllvi^VKnt]^-
18. jninnrmirM
19. lailii d i^ iflu
20. iinnB4%iiiBuliig\iiJniraj
Exercise 36.
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1. That man is very old.
2. That house is very large.
3. I want a sharp knif a
4. Do not speak loud.
5. There are many black cats in that house.
6. He is vpry happy to-diy.
I*
7. Bring me three new Dooks.
8. I will sell thib old horsa
9. Those three children are stupid.
10. Tom is a good natured man.
11. My cat is smaller than yours.
12. It is very hot to-day.
33. That man is very tdl.
(96 )
14. This boy is not younger than you.
15. That horse is larger than this.
16. We shall be ill to-morrow.
17. To-day they will buy a new house.
18. Take away this unripe fruit
Chapter XVI.
THE PRONOUNS.
I. Personal Pronouns. —Great care must be
taken in the use of the personal pronouns^ as
different forms are used according to the rel-
ative rank of the person speaking, the person
spoken to, and the nerson spoken aM)ut. Offence
can be given or takj^n very readily if a pronoun
unsuitcd to the rank of the person be used.
PRONOUNS OP THE PmST PERSON. /.
!• n A highly abusive and a con-
topptuoiis word used to inferiors.
As above but not so abusive.
The general form used to
equals and inferiors.
A polite or official form used
principally in official letters. It
can be used in speaking to
superiors.
2.
iH
3.
^
4.
tJ 1/
5nmsi
( 97 )
5. CJU Used by inferiors to superiors ;
a very polite form. Most Siamese
when talking together use
W rather than ^
6. nnuu As above, only still more
polite.
7.
ranujoj or
Used in speaking to Princes.
& Ti NJrmiSlSI Used in speaking to H. M.
the King of Siam.
9. Wli A polite form used by wo-
men, e.g. a servant to her
mistoess.
10. in ''We/' but it is familiar.
More formal expressions for
''we'' are such phrases as
in micnih wn in mem
PRONOUNS OP THE SECOND PERSON. YOU.
1. U9 A very abusive and contemptuous
word used to inferiors.
2. 104 Rather contemptuous sometimes,
but is the usual form to employ to
a coolie. Parents speakmg to
their children use this word.
( 98 )
3. l"^ or lin Used to servants and inferiors.
4. rhu The general term to equals, but
is rather familiar.
5. nm To superiors. To high officials the
' word IS used as follows. To a
man of the rank of Luang,
fVH VKW. To a man of the rank of
t
Phra, ROl WJr. To a man of the
rank of Phya or Chow Phya,
6. LSQ used by persons of high rank to
each other.
7. t!h wrimfl To Royal Princes.
8. Iw t!h nQ?H B^ mtvm To H. M. The King
of Siam.
9. wm a term of endearment used to
women.
Note. — In speaking to superiors, or to
equals in a formal way, when no intimacy exists
between the parties concerned ; the Siamese
employ a kind of impersonal method to obviate
the use of such words as LSI or yriu.
( 99 )
1. ilii
The name or title of th6 person spoken to
is used instead of the pronoun.
«. g. IWtU s: rwil Jn l#Q Will you come
back ? spealdng to a Phya.
UUJnilwlviU * Where do you come from ' ?
speaking to a ordinary person, uxi— Mr.
PRONOUNS OP THE THIRD PERSON.
HE, SHE, IT, THEY.
It, referring to animals or
children- It is abusive if used
to refer to persons.
Referring to inferiors.
The general form referring
to equals.
Referring to superiors. Be
careful not to connise the use
of this word as a second per-
sonal pronoun with its use as
a pronoun of the third person.
Referring to superiors.
2.
3.
5.
6.
.7.
8.
iin
wn
4. mu
itvh
lli flJU
lumM
i;
I »j
9.
n
Referring to princea
Referring to a Royal Prince.
Referring to the H. M. the
King of Siam.
Referring to Royalty generally.
• • •
m.
(100)
ii. Possessive Pronouns have the same form
as the possessive adjectives g.r. but are
used as follows.
Adjective ill UfM BU 'my horse. '
Pronoun jh WlS HEH %]* This horse is mine'.
Reldtive Pronouns : fl and tA "who, which,
that" e.g. tn i ^^ Ifl WJ fii The horse
which I bought
iv. Hejleodte Pronouns : are formed froni
personal pronouns by the addition of
the word IW e. g. mi IW myself. ^ iKl
IW itself etc. BuW'l^tJU W&ntJ ftllij 9 IW
*' I wrote this letter myself."
V. Interrogative Pronouns :
Iri vulgarly pronounced in who ?
tcl? what?
U Vld^ tTlw whoever ?
U
H how many ? N.B. nlw what is the
time?
iTnlj how much ?
Iw which ?
vi. Indefinite Pronouns :
UTa some, any. fcb any, anything.
Ijj SSlro nobody, isnthey, one, cf. French
on.
( 101)
Wl m everybody. YH flfM both.
YRmrKj,
other. STM *] various. Tin W each, every.
Vocabulary
5,
READ AND LEARN THESE WORDS.
ifl name
wcnn
market
^ to eat
m
word
\}jf\ rice
flpij
theatre
•
fnvru food
1/
cloth
TOJ cup
su
poor
TOJuf^ glass
lUtJ
butter
fcj,f1uill to drink
IIVH
dear
\fm tea
f^
cheap
iklTH country
ti
pig
iflw town
VKN
room
eirrw climate
Ifi
hen
rm shop"
1 la
effcr
( 102 )
%
day
^
head
l^
month
m
eye
tl
year
ear
fr(hm
week
1%
husband
VDDTi
hat
JltJ
wife
tm
garden
db
to say, to report
db
hand
nm
price
Exercise 36.
Read and Translate into English.
1. -itlililPIUJJlflplU
2. uuljififcTjilu
3. IWWfMmjffilT
7. IBITO afMRU isu j/m
8. ftEjiimluminmnfrib
( 108)
9. IfllllJuCJ^^KHUVI^flUUU
11. (ju^iuivnf^umsfwil
12. nuft^lnivluliJi^uffl
13. laimtilalnuiwuh
14. {jvd^w'lwssjn
n n
15. liiillraflssijfi «1^UU
16. ifn^mninlvi^im
m
17. minn*]pmiiBiifhjm
18. io4dpi:;if!tHn«^T#Q
19. flu tj im i isu su uh
a
20. m^llJfl^
21, )!h ^ uu iiii isu fimJIi
22. ITlife'TlLSIRWlll^UUin
23. TriTj'liJSflviiwn'luvd^
24. w m itn fnvra in ^ weh 8
(104)
Exercise 37.
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1. Have you any eggs? 2. Everybody will
drink tea. 3. The man whom I saw was old.
4. Shall you go home this year ? 5. Who saw
me to-day ? 6. In this country the climate is
bad. 7. Go and buy some different glasses.
8. We must sleep every day. 9. What have you
there ? 10. Have you been to market ? 11. How
much is this cup ? 12. They will go to the shop.
13. Whoever will go ? 14. I walk every day in
my garden. 15. How many hens have you?
16. Do not buy that cloth. 17. Nobody likes
pigs. 18. My wife has no butter. 19. Both
those cats are large. 20. Her husband is poor.
21, All my horses are ill. 22, C!ome and have a
drink. 23. I went to the new shop myself.
24. These eggs are not cheap.
Chapter XVII.
THE ADVERB.
Adverbs can be formed from adjectives by
the aid of such words as IwEJ, llhi, Ivi.
( 105)
Examples, m ii 111 "Wl IJQ **he runs quickly. "
lift i8b Wmtw "wash the clothes dean."
The Adjective itself can be used as an
adverb if placed after the verb.
e^. I5n w ^ he runs well.
As a general rule, adverbs come either at
the end or the beginning of a sentence.
*'"^' ifcl ^ llJ inu when I go home.
^ llJ irm ilBEJ •] I often go home
The student should learn the following com-
mon adverbs and adverbial phrases.
L— ADVERBS OP TIME.
^8 to-day
TIU 8 yesterday
TIU ^ U the day before
yesterday
to-morrow
T
the day after
to-morrow
now
presently
ITIEJ Vlf?i afterwards
at once
now
ff^m lil next week
ifeuiil
next month
next year
last year
L^rifraS last month
flTWtjrifluS last week
nil]
m
in future
(106)
YI^B
im
iflfl van just now
to-morrow
morning
lUtalSuTluil yesterday
evening
l^^ dj 14 all night long
•Kl flj pA all day long
iflUQ always
thf ^ livm again
then
every day
iioj 1
l& U this evening
likieriu'iiijniumSdaysago
^insEwenuftintwo or
three days
time
late at night
ever, usually
how old
sometimes
often
never
lin l!h 9 this morning
itiO when. lUaly when? (interrogative.)
n.— ADVERBS OP PLACE.
fll
m
A A
YIU
A 1/
YIUU
where
whence
here
there
yonder
Inn
hence
up and down
back
near
far
(107)
m^f^VU opposite
fl JiflU at home
from home
^millTU
flvw *|n^ anywhere
THliU
ywtfM
TK
lu
TMuen
over
under
underneath
inside
outside
%j f
tlTMUl
in front
behind
ro^llJ straight on
JBlJ,BBlJ3flU around
on the right
ffW5m
1/ L/
irMUTEJ
TlflU
on the left
elsewhere
Tiljl^lvm nowhere
Tin •] IIVH everywhere.
ra— ADVERBS OP MANNER etc.
Via enough
lYTllj, rtuTnuai howmuch?
Yhlu why?
ftmb how
m ^, m UU therefore
fldljl^nu of the same
kind
of another
kind
BtrnlviU what kind ?
fltfwfej
ikirnu
lYnnu
iiiumi
ihunfl'M
IIYIIJ
almost
about
equally
especially
medium
nearly
(108)
•1
correctly
inn much
u
wrongly
arm ifhiliJ too much
111), 1«J in quickly
UfKJ little
m
slowly
UOJ ifhlllJ too little
IDfDjfili
together
UW only
ifiuilri
on foot
ifhi TWI more than
4)}i
on horseback
iiu, iiJu iiu truly
ifn,
very
fltmuuvi^ is that so
Exerc:
Lse 38.
Read and Translate into English.
1. iiriin8 iIIbu VB« u!w
2, IJTUllfMynUflLl'lTWliTUM^iU
tj V *J tL
3. inuffiHLanfl^JTNmiaiunuinuawifnu
4. ^ fi^ ^ iriu ijn ^
6. yhu JJ1 ^ d Yhljj
7. iianimtaitj^lvm
(109 )
10. d piu flLi fl lib uu ikimu WSj nu
11. lusr4]!n1iJ^i0EHUu
12. iithmm^ihfi
14. lininuiFiiiJfwlnniliii
15. iJjti^ ^ ssliJ inu
16. wnfh [117% & f4i
17. ihu ifltj fhi awi rfi
18. NN i! yHu ^ im iri m acH rhu
t
19. Ill inu lib 8 in *^
21. trnHhS ui im srntfD in
22. i^iiinliidi^
23. irm uflulu UTU S ijoj •] tyi
2i ilh i) ^ d rrv in iiJu ^ um
( 110 )
. Exercise 39.
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1. Where have you come from ? 2. Let us go
home the day after to-morrow. 3. That child
eats all day long. 4. Presently they will return.
5. Go to market at once. 6. Last year I was
very ill. 7. Do not go out too late at night.
8- ^metime we go for a drive in the evening.
9. We see these things everywhere. 10. Call
that man sitting yonder. 11. There is too much
sugar in the tea. 12. What kind of box do you.
want ? 13. Why do you drink that water ? 14.
They have not had enough to eat. 15. Tom and
I came together. 16. I want more money than
this 17. These two glasses are ^qual. 18. The
garden is in front of the house. 19. They are
walking behind the house. 20. This is nearly
correct 21. My house is opposite to yours. 22.
We have almost reached home. 23. The book
is underneath the table. 24. He says he has
never seen a tiger.
( 111 )
Chapter XVIII.
PREPOSITIONS CONJUNCTIONS
INTERJECTIONS.
The Prepositions in Siamese are : —
fl at, to.
su^
until
ti extending to
man
through
lu in
mm
since
m, ^rm from
m/aii
in order to
im to (dative)
fm,m
with
UU on
1 • 'S
without
1^ under
ufiri sTn
except
vn before, (place)
mil
according to
mm „ (time)
IWXlWl'h because
V^ behind
IIYIU
instead of
lumrw between
fij near by the side of
The Conjunctions in Siamese are : —
llfl, lire, filJ and m but
mU,lVl9QU fill also
V^
or
^ fsms n ^ however
iwnr'auu
therefore
( 112 )
lira
tn,tniiJJU7i if
and then
PIJU,thtl once upon a time
then
^
QU4 besides
Common Ifiterjections in Siamese are : —
Ivm! 4ii
Y calling attention
LLJJIQEJ! ISILOJ!
Wflls ! llli !
T
OJ ! BEJ! BTEJ
T II
IIVDJ!
190!
WTO ^!
?l lira ! Iw !
indicating surprise
indicating pain
J}
9f
9f
9 9
disgust
joy
sorrow
consent
vm
Vocabulary 6.
LEARN THESE WORDS
time
llfllTltnJ'Jli in the daytime
lOfrmtTHl^J in the night
iim liim
T
ixn tn
rifti
midday
dawn
dusk
riis )
Mil
vifaim
hi
mn
» y
imtn
fim
WMITI
T
1/
UQU
mm
vntjlililfej
siuJu
agreement
soldier
army
soil, land
sea
river
canal
mountain
valley
fertile
fat
thin
to tell
to be lost
urgent
i;
TO
T
TO oraer
business
umrn
cocoanut
1£UM
mango
Rfrw
clean
Hmbn
dirty
Likjn
wet
lira
•
dry
Innfj
the earth
vorxrwm
the sun
WKSUTO
the moon
mi
VDJU ffOJ
T
star
path way
to go round
to revolve
( 114 ) ,
Exercise 40.
READ AND TRANSLATE INTO ENGLISH.
2. fiq fuiJb fi ^ itu s:1iJ ft uu
3. ^m uu oy fli Tcifl
4. ifm m^ wi ^ iwfi^il vim iki
5. nvmluncHfiifuucjQjJuh
6. ifn iHi uilvi iin im iJTifi vrfb
7. in inu flii 9u
m
a lionsiinuuuljjjJlfljjji
9. rnu d lun flCH ^ vi^ ]jfi ^ vift^
10. fWEM uu ft Em ivi^ fiii
11. tSumm^
12. 'Su iliunenu^iin^vitl^vntiliJi^iim
18. mcjsf^! iln^uuiiiwiftuliJ
14, ynfiln ! Th ftm wi mbj
16. flLlfKJ llui^iJin
T t
16. YllUSll %lU3J«'lvi'i!ufl1UUfl
(116 )
17. uonpmuulviinwNB
18. iv\ti}hvmim\mmf\tvitm9hm
19. inu nSij in iJTU Vhlii
20. inrc wi jj BK siiiJu
' Exercise 41.
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1. There are four cocoanuts on the table. 2. I
have been well since last year. 3. I live near the
river. 4. The Earth goes round the sun. 5. One
book is under the table. 6. The moon is smaller
than the Earth. 7, There are four men in that
house. 8. This valley is very fertile. 9. There
is a valley between those mountains. 10. The
soldiers marched through the country. 11 I
will come instead of you. 12. The army has
reached the sea. 13. My books are at home.
14 This is not according to your agreement.
15. I came before he did. 16. The soil near the
canal is wet.
(116)
Chapter XIX.
TIME, MONEY, WEIGHTS AND
MEASURES.
Time.— The Siamese method of reckoning
the hours of the day is as follows. They start
from sunrise (6 a.m.) and count six hours till
noon: —
Thus sunrise (6 a.m.) is VXO WOi
7 a.m. lOfllTw llfi
8 a.m. iQtn mi\m iv)
. 9 a.m. lom WuHlH m
10 a.m. vimilm iifi
11 a.m. iwn wfllM l^
12 noon. i«n iflw
From noon onwards, they count six hours
till. sunset (6 p.m.) as follows.
1p.m. lotnintjlw
2 p.m. l<Xn irtJ MM Iw
3 p.m. i-jmimmiiliH
4 p.m. i<xn iru ^lu4
(117)
5 p-in.
lom intj vhliM or vn
ItJU
6 p.ni.
liHiQu
lom vm iiH iflu or iQfn
wmj or lom !ji m
From 6 p.m to 6 a.m. they reckon 12 hours
called riu
T
Thus 7 p.m-
r
3 p.m.
lom «fM TIJJ etc
up to 5 a.in.
LOT fhj IQW TOJ
The night is also divided into watches called
tnu
Thus 9 p.m. is often called iQtn tTOJ VIU^
Midnight LW1 RfM tlTJJ
3 a.m. i-Jtn RTJJ im
Since the introduction of European clocks
many Siamese call the hours by the same num-
bers as is done in English.
For the fractional parts of the hour the
following expressions are used.
(118)
(i) For the half hour, the word nS^ ' half ' is
added.
e.g. 2-30 p.in. I WIITCJ (<i« llM nS^
(ii ) For periods of less than half an hour, they
say so many hours and minutes.
e.g. 2-15 p.m. i-jm ino «w IjH Su vh ui^
. (iii.) Forpmods of more than half an hour,
they reckon it as the next hour less so
many minutes.
e.g. 2-46 p. m. IWI IHEJ fTDJ llH !j] llJ i) !hj vh
Ulfl or IQtn iru «TJJ Iw &
The Siamese language has adopted the
English word minute Wff\ which is often used
' instead of the word U1YI. A second of time is
5lriyl.
{■"ormerly the hour was divided into 6 parts
of 10 minutes each, called inn^ but this is no
longer used.
The Month is reckoned in two ways.
(i) The Oficial style, in which the months
correspond fo those of the Gregorian calender ;
the name being taken from the ^igns of the iZodiac
(119)
January.
unmj
July.
vanpni
num]^
August
Hwwj
•
Sept^nber.
fknsn
ujinju
October.
■
mm
T
nqumnu
November.
WjRsmtJU
SnuTJu
December.
iuviiu
March.
April
May.
June.
(ii.) The Popular Lunar reckoning. Each
month has 29 or 30 days alternately.
These months are numbered from 1 to 12,
but the first month is called l^ fTSJ and the
second l^ u. Every 3 years a 13th month has
to be intercalated ; the eighth month i^ luJn
is reckoned twice over.
These lunar months are usually one month
in advance of the ordinary calendar months i. e.
the second month i^ u is somewhere about
January.
Each of these lunar months is divided into
two parts, (i) The waxing of the Moon, from
new to full (lu) (ii.) The waning of the Moon,
( 120)
from full to new (llJlJ) Each day is called m.
Thus the fourth day of the waning moon of the
5th month would be iJIbu vh linj ^ m . The^wr
or Siamese holy-days always occur oathe 1st 9th
15th of the waning and 8th of the waxing, or
else on the 8th and 15th of the waxing and the
8th and 15th of the waning in alternate months.
The common people invariably use this
made of reckoning. In order to find out the cor-
responding day in the Gregorian calendar, the
best way is to purchase a Siamese almanac
(l^filiiiW) costing 1 salung.
In these almanacs the days of the month.
Gregorian or Official system, are put in parallel
columns with the Lunar reckoning thus.
This rather cabalistic ar-
rangement of figures requires
some explanation. The Left
hand column is simply the days
of the month (Official reckon-
ing.)
February.
T
ft
61
+ 5^cn
Id
\)^cn
en
al T^cn
■" ■■— d
(121)
The right hand column refers to the lunar
reckoning. The sign T means the waxing or
waning of the moon and the numeral above or
below it the number of the fTl or day. When
the numeral is over the sign i it means waxing
moon, ((yw 2U) ) when the numeral is under the
sign ^ it signifies waning moon (314 imj)
The numeral on the right hand side of T is
the number of the lunar month, and the numeral
on the Irft hand side of T indicates the day of the
week 6) being Sunday is Monday and so forth.
The mark ^ against the left hand numeral indi-
cates TU mz (Siamese holy day. )
Therefore the first line of the above calendar
corresponding to Feb. 1st will be Thursday Wan
Pra the eight day of the waxing moon of the
3rd month.
The days of the week are :
Qf
Sxmday gu tnflWEJ
Monday ' gii siilflJ
•J •J
Tuesday "JU !MPn?
•J
Wednesday QU W8J
•J _ •J ^
Thursday TU WjVMUW
(122)
Friday 9u flTlT
Saturday & itru
Siamese holy day & wr
It is an interesting fact to notice that the
names of the days in Siamese are practically the
same as the names in any European lan^^ge
the days being caUed after the planets m the
order, oun, Moon, Mars, Mercury, Jupiter, Venus,
Saturn. Thus jfj fllfPEJ means, literally Sunday.
THE YEAR
There are three eras used in Siamese chro-
nology.
(L) The official era Ratinakosinsok 7. fl. dat*
ing from the foundation of Bangkok A.D. 1782.
(ii) Th^ old civil era ( Chulasakkarat ) dating
from A. D. 638.
(iii) The religioits era (Puttasakkarat) dating
from the death of Buddha B. C. 543.
The official new year begins on April 1st
The present year 1906 A. D. (April) is
equivalent to 125 Ratinakosinsok. 1268 Chula-
sakkarat or 2449 Puttasakkarat
. The popular method of reckoning years, is
by cycles of twelve, named after various animals
(128)
The following is the popular (^cle. '
ij ^fvi year of the Rat.
ti TO » M ,f Ox.
II
II mu MM M Tiger.
il Itrc M M M Rabbit.
11 «1n m „ M Large Dragon.
II mew M ». „ Small Dragon.
fl IcJltJ M M M Horse.
fl mm „ „ „ Goaf
$1 gon „ „ „ Monkey.
D Km M »> »> Cock.
D SB „ „ „ Dog.
il ng „ „ „ Pig.
There is a small handbook published in
Siamese giving tables for reducing these popular
dates to official Ratinakosinsok dates, and from
thence it isquite easy to reduce the Siamese dates
to their Gregorian equivalents.
(124)
MONEY.
The Siamese money table is as follows :-
2 lots
2 atts
Ifflln —
R^
IJTlfl
2 pies —
2 song pies =
2 fuangs —
4 salungs —
4 ticals —
20 tamlungs —
The coins in circula
and song pie, Bronze ; f uang, salung, and tical,
Silver.
The tamlung and the catty are merely sums
ot money.
The silver coins are used as weights ; and
other weights are derived from them.
TABLE OF SIAMESE WEIGHTS-
att
In
pie
song pie or seek in
fuang li^
salung
tical
tamlung
catty
ion are -f- lot, att, jpie,
5 lee m
— 1 hoon mi
5 boon
1
— 1 fuang
2 fuangs
— 1 salung etc. as money table
50 catties
— 1 picul vnu - 133 J lb.
(125)
The tical is about 15 grams or j^ oz. and the
catty is about 2f lbs. Avoir. Besides the * lee ^
and 'hoon' which strictly speaking are Chinese
weights used for opium and gems, there are
several other small weights, but they are not
important.
Sums of money are thus denoted,
catties d
tamlungs
salungs
ticals
61
fuangs
en
61
pies
(i)
(2)
Thus fig 2 would represent the sum of 5
catties 1 tamlung 2 ticals 3 salungs 1 f uang 2 pies
or 406 ticals 60 atts.
To represent atts put the number in the
place for pies and with the word BJ after it.
SuMESE Long Measure.
4 krabiet, nnilEJW — 1 Niw (inch) Sq
12 Niw. = 1 Kheub (span) hi
1 Kheub,
= 1 Sawk (cubit) flfln
(126;
4 Sawk, — 1 Wah 71
20 Wah. = 1 Sen i«u
400 Sen, = 1 Yote Itm
A ' Wah ' is practically 2 metres, or a little
over 2 yards. 40 sen are practically 1 mile.
Siamese Measure of Capacity for liquids and
Dry goods.
4 Kham meu, ttl jfe = (handful) « 1 tchang-
awn ^wu
2 tchangawn = 1 tanan TfiUTli (coconut
shell)
20 tanan = 1 tang ^ dpailful)
25 tanan = 1 sat ^ (bushel)
100 tang, or 80 sat =1 coyan in^ (cart
load.)
A ' Tanan ' is nearly 1 litre or about 1 quart.
Square msasure. For measurements of area,
the unit is the square wah. A square sen is
called a rat uf (acre.)
Cubic measure for sawn timber. The unit is
the yok llD which is 16 wah long 1 sawk wide
and 1 niw thick, 1 yok = 11-44 cubic feet
approximately.
(127)
Vocabulary 7.
\h
boat
Vf^
comb.
rnamu
plank.
i%irc
to laugh.
tmu
road.
ihn
mouth.
dimju
English.
(% namely, for example
(jT^im
French.
^Ha
oil.
ilSBUli
German.
i?iiiufTF
1 kerosine oil.
tik
European.
rarmH
paper.
viilm
clock.
LTlfe
salt.
ii«!lEiu
derk.
iwhlifiti
pepper.
uvnu •
ring.
yiSh
chilies.
nwj
round.
inoj^
accounts.
^fiw
to be bom.
ifim ■
shoes, slippers
131 llJ^
paddy.
Pff4
opposite to,
equivalent to.
Exerc]
READ AND TRANSL
1 lumihifrwljMliuJ
Lse 42.
iTB INTO ENGLISH.
MS inn.
t
2 i-jm ui N yriu «n Sj
leojflvifb^
(128)
4 ^lli m t&i im Piu uu lilQ % ^9Prs.
5 ifo di 9 mi iJnnu fm m.
6 iflQ^JiiiirarifmTnuTwifiirifewbwJhlifitJ ?
8 iflDuu afN 'flu isu ui 1% lUFi i^ mrroj iim.
9 iJQnnuJmlviiniTil[ulu'iuw]wiJ^tr^
lu ihriwi 8 iQtn dhau luaiiu fnrrw n wm um.
1 m uanoi lai iflwinluUm?! iAjjS aiti mlw lyitIj.
2 i<KnirKJ^suifif^sr1illQii)i!nieKH9]imvitvid^^.
3 ii!lB \hu n?rBjTDJifmil«5nuui jjufrwliJ fiilu'''
5 tiuufluiftrniinniuftifiu''
6 liuu ing)^ SlHu ra:m* uu fiBU 5u i«Tj ill.
7 in ui fi9 iJnifin (fi^im lu i^ fjuipu.
8 InjInifViiilQ^fijflaii^lhniiejuil}. a(i)o\>i
9 i^ it imj vm f4i nn ffij !% fl irnb ?
20 mMmTM^iy^iiThmir^tcyftii^
(129)
Exercise 43.
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1. Come at half past five p.m. on Friday.
2. He came home at 3 a.m. yesterday. 3. I
shall be busy at 4 p.m. to-morrow. 4. It is now
twenty minutes to 6 p.m. 5. It is 10.45 am.
6. I shall go home in April. 7. Come and see me
on Thursday morning. 8. Next Friday week
1 shall be very busy. 9. This table is 3 sawk
long and 2 sawk wide. 10. How much is this
paddy per coyan? 11. I will return at noon.
12. Will you go for a walk at 10. a.m ? 13. I
cannot see him at 9 p.m. 14. It was raining at
12.30 p.m« 15. It is five minutes to 5 p.m.
16. They will arrive in November. 17. I went
out to find him last Monday. 18. In what year
were you bom. 19. The Siamese inch is smaller
than the English inch. 20. I want a plank about
2 wah long.
(180)
Chapter .XX.
SOME MISCELLANEOUS SUMESE IDIOMS.
1. Yes and No. There are various forms of
affirmation and negation used in Siamese whidi
differ according to the rank of the persons
concerned.
Yes. No.
to equals and inferiors.
2. Mjii iiJfli afrfij, liilii m\i
to superiors.
T T
to princes.
f T
to H. M. the King of Siam.
5. i^Tifi a polite form used by women to men.
There are various other forms of affirma-
tion and negation which are used in answers to
questions, vmich differ according to the nature
of the question asked.
^.g. uiil lit not have llJW cannot
■■ . 1
(lai )
Question filliut]] 'Have you a house'?
Answer Tiifi- 'No' or Si - 'Yes'.
Question ifriu Vh Sl« tj] 'Can you do this' ?
Answer IjiV 'No' W— 'Yes'.
The forms II V and Tli llJu are often
used instead of the usual lli wi (cannot).
2. Qtt6f^^ton^.— Questions are asked by ad-
ding the particle rf| to the end of the sent-
ence, c.f. chap. 12. § 9 and 10. e.g. mu llJ IW l[|
' can you go ?'. Questions of this nature, which
in English would be answered by a simple yes
or no, are answered in Siamese by repeating
the verb as follows.
Affirmative. mWi Lit. go can — Yes.
N€sgative. ilj llJ w Lit. * go not can'.— No.
A double form of question is often used :—
eg. ynullJ lirn t[l tW=' Have you gone?'
Lit " Have you gone or not yet ?"
Affirmative answer. llJllfW Have gone— Yes.
Negative answer, tw Not yet = No.
( 132 )
The word tJ9 is rather perplexing since it
is used to mean * yet ' and ' not yet ' in different
sentences.
3. Subordinate Clauses.— \n Siamese^ sub-
ordinate clauses are usually plac^ before main
clauses, when the reverse order is usually em-
ployed in English.
e.ff. lllO BU Iw IMU IflTU linQ mi IM JJ1 TO
I arrived after I had seen you.
Lit When I had seen you I arrived.
4. In certain relative sentences the object
precedes the verb.
e. g. l3\1 i m% IJ l^ VWM lUW.
I have spent all the money that I had.
5. The word lltn is always placed last in a
sentence when it is the sign of the perfect tense
N. B. In questions with tj], the word liw
would come before lyj.
When lun is placed first in a sentence, it isa
Conjunction meaning ' and then '.
• %j
6. The word RTWIJ means *for the purpose
of 'usedfor' Mnorderto^ By the aid of this
( 138 )
word, and the word iPlffiM ^^ apparatus/' many
ideas can be readily expressed which have no
exact Siamese equivalents.
e.g. jflfriwiia 'a saddle horse' Lit. a
horse for riding.
imH fhvdlJ iru nJ ^ a camera '. Lit apparatus
for making pictures.
1. n is an intensitive particle used to add
emphasis to a sentence. It is frequently used
with the verbs IR^ and t.
e.g. tfu Yh S nljl, 'I can (certainly) do this.
% n Jl *He has cows', i.e. 'he has cows for
certain'.
8. Oin is the negative form of the
imperative
e.g. fltnfnfi 'Do not do this'.
9. fk is often used in the sense of to reach,
to arrive at.
e.g. ^^ro^lTMlun 'I have arrived in
Bangkok.
( 184)
10. ifkn always gives the idea of pleasure
as opposed to VK business.
Note these phrases.
Ill ifvfl to go out on pleasure.
-bj lien TO to go out for a drive*
l9lu (iJ mn to go out for a walk.
uJ inn \Jhi to go out for a sail or a row.
11. The English Gerund or Gerundive is
expressed by the phrase nufl ^ or lu rm fl SS.
^^0. mjftsrIiJftuuemnil
Going there is pleasant.
12. Note the idioms of these words.
(a) To wash flUJ, lift, rfw
QHJ vi . to bathe, to wash oneself.
'Sf\ — to wash clothes.
mi — to wash plates, hands, things
generally.
(6) To carry (lb, Itun, vnu, VPU, aj, ft
(lb to carry in the hand.
UUn to carry on the shoulder,
h-<i-*.-l. I
(135 )
vnu to carry on litter or palanquin,
vnu to carry on the back.
flu to carry a child on the hip.
m to carry at arm's length.
13. The word ilJni usually means ''not'
but it is used in many phrases to mean ** in vain ''
or '* simply.''
e.g. LVmoj llllTI '] To labour in vain. Lit.
tired for nothing.
U1 m llini *] Tea without anything added to
it.
14. The word ^ gives the idea of vague-
ness in numerical expressions,
e.g yfni Jl l31l ^ Lfflb About how much
money have you ?' ^ il i3li #1 wui vrtn I have
a few ticala Lit about three or four ticals.
Note.— ^ ^ teak tree UJ m teak wood.
15. The word m is used in the same way
with IJM (hour) to mean 'per hour' feljM re LTfllb
'How much per hour'. ?
(136)
COLLOQUIAL EXPRESSIONS AND MISCEL-
LANEOUS SHORT IDIOMATIC PHRASES.
You are right ynu nn
You are wrong. ynu On llJ
What do you call this ? B l^ T1 fcb
Where have you been ? ifhulll'lliu Jfl
Where are you going ?
ifhu "cliilvm
What is the matter ?
iiiu fcb
How old are you ?
fnyirnb
Turn to the right
Turn to the left.
iKmfsj
Go straight on.
rnIiJ
Go back home.
ndiilil ijTU
I heg your pardon.
ubItu
Come hera
in tt f or tf) tt iiv:
Go there.
Tijfluu
Where do you live ?
iriufliifllviu
What do you want? wwmiab
( 187 )
What business is it of «
yours ? BJt ffi iJ
What is your name ? M ffi IJ
What is the time ? ftljMuJw
I am not quite sure. iililjJ^Uli orljj TOTU
Can you do it or not ? fh'tei vAlu'W
Where can I find it ? vnlJl ftlviu
I cannot do it fh 111 1(1
Will you do it ? *1 V^ ulm
Is dinner ready ? ' flTVlTJ IRIS IIW vrfb &
All right. ^ llin
I do not know what it is. ftmb n 111 YIJTIJ
Anythmg wiU do. fcb •] flTil
What are you doing ? inws
Go right away. i^ llJ f
What have you got there? S) fclj ft &
What is this used for ? S^rvrfiierl?
Be quiet. d^ 9 or i^ '^
(188)
How much is this P urvniinl}
How do you do? vhuflirutf]
Quite well thank you. flUU ^
Goodbye i^tnmi
Good l^e (more polite), uutnlilrifiuor wmt
That is all nonsense uii lu llJu l^
Please (mvitation)
1%
Please take some
i!iq) j^nbsmu ^ viucKJ
Thank you.
Muls
Thank you very much.
Mulsymjjfm
I do not want it
Ijilfll
No thank you (polite).
sou Is lun ifg rnu if
mi f^)h?
No, he is not at home
u-ulueiy
Bye and bye.
iln^neu
Wait a minute.
•
noEJiJnAn
There is none left.
vm \iifi or III t ivik
( 189 )
Have you any more. !) ^ lift) UJ
Give me some more^
ifninan
Just a very little.
^ifui
At fiill speed.
iniTOJiliK)
Too bad for words.
i^fi.
Excessive
ivifki ifhi
It is all quite spoilt.
tuvriu vun i^
Small change.
L^iJtin
You worthless fellow.
fl^Quvm
Chinaman (slang term)
To ride in a Ricksha /
(slang term).
vmviji
One's native land. inu l^ in
What date is it to-day ? ^fiftlYnb
Take care. v:^ f
You are very foolish ! Ktn ^ *]
You liar ! ffltjlnnn
Hurry up! m 131
( 140 )
To give change.
TIEIU ¥l\
Never mind.
•
lllllJu si}
Slacken speed.
iinmiDEi
Stop.
Vl^
Get out of the way.
vtflnmEil
Can you speak English ?
^«^u%Tn
Wait for an answer.
nou nou
Late at night.
An
To get the carriage
ready.
un vi
n
To pull a punkah.
iih fin
SOME SIAMESE PROVERBS.
A certain insight into the mode of thbu^ht
of a nation niay be obtained by an examination
of its common proverbial expressions.
Notice the following common Sianiese pro-
verbs, their literal tran^tions, and the equiv-
alent English proverbs.
( 141 )
1. ViSl ife ik SJia lit. If you run away
from the tiger, you meet the crocodile; Par-
rallel English Proverb. Out of the frying pan
into the fire.
2. wrfnfipljljJ naSJ fh lit. The Sun 'does not
wait Parallel English Proverb. Time and tide
wait for no man.
3. Ill ih fltn ^ wn lit. When you go into
the jungle do not forget your knife. Parallel
English Proverb. Forewarned is forearmed.
4. iPn l!bj am 37M ih lit. Do not send your
boat aoross a rapid. Parallel English proverb.
Do not run your head agjunst a stone wall.
Translate, and give the parallel English proverbs
(where possible) for the following Siamese
proverbs.
1. fim itii JcmTj iTW JJ1 sriEJ fnj Tami.
2. i^ufmoinliiwyrai^.
T
3. 8iJ i&j Wfcj flo Iq ^ nil.
( 142)
4.
vammtmJim.
6.
rhi^ihiu.
6.
inr 171 lilfi in (iu.
7.
piu iw on ibnnn.
8.
piu Sr fui (hn.
9.
ikn^ntTiAsk
10.
mtilufltniin flon.
11.
rrufhahroulli.
12.
Qin in On p& VI.
II
13.
fim iih ^ yi^ unn.
14.
VDJiivnvonljjfiw.
15.
mitmfvruiim.
16.
17.
sm uon wiTr ^lu iiJulwN.
18. 1
^ .nij ^ «h.
19. 1
fi fclviu iJm n fta iij
20. '
1
ji rm vnz ^ piu ^ imt m
21. !
Dfl Pira ntrw viufw.
( 148 )
Chapter XXI.
LETTER WRITING.
The chief formulae used in Siamese corres-
pondence to begin and to end a letter are as
follows ;—
1. From master to servant, father to child,
superiors to inferiors generally.
Be^ ti and put the name.
End with signature only.
2. From a firm to a private individual or
vice f>&i*8a, or between equals where no intimacy
exists : —
Begin 11^ fflUJ JJ1 OJ (iVaw6) yiriUTOJ
EndluftwifiafliuwwTiJuijdbintH mi
and signature or use PITDJ IPrmj instead of ffW
3. Between friends of equal rank : —
Begin liwmu Wl fh U1 ?K {Name) yinil mi
End lu ^Wl 9 M LIWH fflTIJ jh lin PfJTJJ irjn JJ1
tKlhuroo Signature.
( 144 )
4. From a private individual or firm to a
man of title, i.e. Luang, Pi», Phya, or Chow
Phya or from servant to master.
Begin rtmlll mi&m (Name&Title) TBTIJ WJtl
or itfJUinOJfflU (Name&Title)" vanimi
End liifi«wSMii«wn7iuuu!tetR^
nm (Name and Title) mi and Signature.
Note. — If to a phya or chow phya use
hf
ISTPWU with the name.
T
5 Prom a private individual or a firm to
a prince of the rank of Mom Chow: —
Begin pn in fJj vujfljjisi (Name) nrmmi
End nvS fTOlun ivi s: mhim and Signature.
6. From a private individual or a firm to
a Royal Prince :—
Begin rrnm wn^fi UWOlim (Name and
Title) YDHJiJiwnmfi
PT
(145)
End. (TOJlfTO llfW llWSr lllwireiT] and
signature.
( For examples of Siamese letters see
Exercises 116-135).
Notes on Siamese*. Titles.
There are two classes of Siamese titles : —
1. Royal titles, which are hereditary to a
certain extent.
2. Non Royal titles, which are not
hereditary.
1. lioyai Titles,
The children of the King by the Queen have
the rank of ISI ^ Chow fa.
The Crown Prince has the title of
vmf\ WJriDwlflWn 5rra. Somdet Praboromorasah-
tirat.
Other children of the King have the title of
wawn LSI. Pra Ong Chow.
These princes may be raised to the title of
Krom rmj of which there are several degrees.
The sons of all these princes are called
VDJDIJ LSI . Mom Chow, and are grandsons of
the King.
The son of a Mom Chow is a Mom Racha-
wongse; VDJOU nimu and the son of a Mom
(146)
Rachawongse is a Mom Luang ; VDJOJ yicm. The
son of a Mom Luang is an ordinary commoner
untt — Mn
Thus it may be seen that Royal titles die
out in five generations.
2. Non Royal titles. A commoner (UIU ) may be
raised to the following titles of whidi the first
named is the lowest
. 1. Khoon. |U 2. Luang. VKfH 3. Pra NK
4. Phya wrm 5. Chow Phya LSI WJSUI 6. Som-
det Chow. Phya j WJJl^lSIWSm.
These titles are equivalent to European
orders oif knighthood and must not be translated
fo^such titles as Baron, Marquis, etc,, as these
Siamese titles are not hereditary.
Note (i.) the sons of noblemen of the rank
of Phya or higher bear the courtesy title of ntu
Note (ii.) MomVDJEQJ alone is a title for the
wives of Princes.
fnu and ^ are abusive epithets or titles ap*-
plied the former to men and the latter to women,
iliese words are equivalent to the English words
'* varlet '' or '* fellow '' in the old meaning of the
words. These terms are used also for cnminals.
m^
( M7 )
Siamese habitually give the title of noi to their
elder relatives when referring to thenL
e.g. noiN elder brother or sist^. PilUNO
father nuLuJ mother, ffluth aunt, etc*
fflMU ^ are used as pet names for
small children*
Chapter XXIL
THE COURT LANGUAGE.
There are very many special words which
are used when speaking to or about Royal
personages in Siamese instead of the ordinary
words.
These words usually betifin with ^either the
prefix UK for nouns or, ifi;4 which shews that the
word following is a verb.
Most of the words are derived or taken
directly from the Pali and Sanskrit languages.
It is not necessary for Europeans to learn to
speak the Court language, but it is useful to
know somethinsf about it, as it is always employ-
ed in Royal proclamations, official notices; history,
aiid all matters relating to Royalty.
. The principal classes of these special words
are :
(148)
1. The paiiif ojthe Imhi. Examples.
Hair ordinary word uu Royal word wrma
Foot „ lYn „ *wnrm
Ear ., ti ,, Ytmffdl
Mouth „ ihn „ wrlflj
etc. etc. etc
2. Comvwn ohj('rt.i> belonging to and used bif
Royalty.
Clothes, ordin. word L«B tn Royal word BRfM mVQVi
Mosquito net,, IM „ VffSkVfti
Walkingstick,, Ijj lyfl „ STJWjmr
etc. etc. etc.
3. A Hichs ofjooil and dnnk.
Tea ordinary wt)rd UTBI Royal word WK«B1JPI KM
Food generally,, mjiai fnvnj „ wmrmitwu
etc etc. etc.
4. Most names of common fruits and fish
used as articles of food, also certain kinds of
flowers, e. ff.
Melon, ordinary word, lira lu Royal word. tJfl fHfl
Sole (fish) „ „ iJmmivDJi „ iJm^emha
f
etc. etc. etc. »
.«■' J
( 149)
5. The King Relatites e. g.
Uncle
Aunt
fM Royal word imrwor
etc
etc.
t
etc.
6, Most common ve7'h» of bodily action.
Togo
llJ Royal word
To go for a
walkllJ iftui
yj
To sleep
uem
jy
To eat
•
fhj niibfnu
V
To think
Wl
V
To write or
read l^UO,BTU -
»7
To permit
To give
Ivi
9J
To offer (to the
King)
V
to die
m\
J)
etc-
etc
imvDi
VDruni mnuiyn
WKruynu
tira
fWJffW
etc.
(150)
I
7. Names oj Anitnals.
m
ligy ordinary word vol Royal word ilru
I>og ,f
von
»»
(lilho
Cow „
fi
>>
ii
Buffalo „
mti
tt
rntfif)
et&
etc
etc.
The student will find a complete list of
these words in any of the 43mall nooks called
EXAMPLES OF 'SENTENCES SHOWING THE DIF-
FERENCE BETWEEN ORDINARY SIAMESE AND
HIGH SIAMESE.
1. Where is he going? I5n srlll ifbj Inu.
Where is His Majesty going? wnJT»l«JJi«S
2. I will give you this horse. ^ ^Ivj m ^ i
imm
May I present Your Majesty with this horse.
a Mayldothis? Mlvi^VhmjSfcS'teW
(161)
May it please Your Majesty to giadously
permit me to do this ? Tl YOsmnilSI 30 fil Wirm
T
4. He said that he was ill ITI % 1^ 71171
His Majesty said that he was unwell.
ilXAMPLE OP A CONTINUOUS PASSAGE IN
HIGH SIAMESE.
The King having passed a good night, arose
next morning and partook of tea and ^;gs His
Majesty then received a deputation from the
leading merchants, who presented a petition.
His Majesty was dressed in full military uniform
with medals. In the afternoon, the Royal phy-
sician was summond to the Royal Palace, as Her
Majesty the Queen was suffering from a severe
toothache, which however was speedily cured.
T T
( 152)
*
rrafW&mjiir. lu lom inti ll wrunjmilfwmj Ivi vn
iivm!i VKW 171 un lu* novum vmm ^ iwre ivm 71 «u
m rarui4 1^ rm wsiJrsv wmun um linlii in ff vru
Chapter XXIII.
SOME POINTS OF SIAMESE ORTHOGRAPHY.
I and l. The vowel I is used only in the
following words, most of which are very fre-
quently used. Those of less common occurrance
are marked wit}i an asterisk. "^
Irifl near. lH to use.
m whoeverl
Iwi new.
Iro who?
Iw to wish for.
lnqj
large.
1 ^
w
under, south.
lu
in.
h
•
leaf, sail.
f 163 )
IS heart. iiT dumb.
ii it is so. '*' lc3 to think about.
fcm daughter-in-law.
lEJ fibre, spider's web.
* VKmIvw infatuated.
IR clear, pure.
iR to put.
W to give.
Words ending in the sound of K.P.T. usual-
ly have the letters a U. n. as the final consonants
respectively. The following are the common
exceptions to this rule, in addition to which the
more conmion words will be found which contain
the less commonly used consonants, arranged
under the respective consonants.
1 (final) m happy, itn figures, numbers,
n (final) Iw disease. WW company.
tain tovolunteer-
n PTO neck.
<a V) to kill ^agong.
l^ to beat, rym a large bell.
(154)
mv a trolley, um a cloud, iitfm}
exeicutioner.
S (fiiud) i itm lazy lei^ prince tm able
nm to inspect ^luis power, authority
fh duty actions inn finished ifk
mendacious ^hm Royal Lictors.
H (final) (oilrni solemn procession vnnn merchant
va to enter the priesthood.
01 iQifl a tree.
^ lll^l large ^lK^ important vi^ grass
UOqi Peguan n^ woman figj zero
ifgj to invite rniOj clever i^WQj to pros-
per tri^ ordinary iiJQjS five n^S lock
llJjbqj professor IVD^ dollar, medal
(VTlfft) to praise, national anthem.
Ul^ accounts. q|fi relations, and some
others.
•*» t . a
(165 )
^^ ^^y^ agreement, contract 9^)^ soul
ikffffl wisdom, talent.
Tj vtj priesfs quarters tjpn petition, paybill
Irt) ten millions Vtyoni laws llnraj
clear, intelligible TMTp populace icpl
crown used by actors ntr^TW July.
^ lli:^ almanac li^ goad.
J ^ att. Sj brick. ^ camel. lkl%J
excellent leo^ rich man. f6inn gov-
enmient. {^p position, form.
II JJWTIfl province, county.
1/ f
It wp Wednesday, uiwioldmsui. mirarMU
the planet Mercury.
01 ikaillU about, {fntu aristocratic, well bred
rail benefit, or a title, luntu ancient.
iffigu neighbourhood. RuNIYItJ orchestra.
(156)
fl (final) jfjtnw to notice- wnflw proverbs-
tl (final) RTiniEl brave, Jtl carriage, aun mutiny,
rebellion, fnici oath, lutl temple or shrine.
71 (final) iJTifi tical ^QTlfi quarrel, disturbance.
ikanvi to despise, un lesson, chapter, iJ^HYl
commercial company.
2 W flag, BIT business, LM (See pronouns)
ml joss stick, BTIB weapons Sin culprit, inn
angry, SUYlwrni eclipse of the moon, ^HMXi
T
eclipse of the sun, 'oJ method, flliuft? bank
note, amvn ordinary, smJldtAI custom
jjnj right, duty, justice.
li ■ (find) inJwfckedBess, shame, Jll form, shape.
vi^ continent
n (final) nw WW army, Jlj mw picture, flH corpse,
ipniw to respect, fff^ ivnn Bangkok.
(157)
n ffiun Chinese junk Rsm daughter in law^
iwn: only, fflina district niai mountain,
fTffM power, ^Wj pink, nmn wife, lUJfM^
hornet mtJ Vllil for the future and many
other words.
J pronounced as U %n? temple, MIJ soldier,
BTVn? food, pro ought to, irnu Cambodian,
IvItJI diligent, w f avoiir, mj work, business
HUrru chief priest, abbot.
? Pronounced OHli
UPIJ city, nro theatre, BJIH? consonant
flllini club, assembly.
n Pronounced flii
UJWI tribe,, race, mm to load, UJJWI
line, TOKf] wife, fipWltl curious,
inquisitive, fmn to choose, nnu death,
misfortune, mu duty, justice.
(158 ;
unuim} poresents, nnf), pr^^nant, wnn or
VTUI Buddhist Lent and many others.
TO Pronounced 1
vasm\ Ministry, mn property, wealth,
Timj to know, Tinu common, inferior,
\Ste\\ra Kedah, m\ra A tree, unfiuvd
eagle, WSl (Tti) sand, m4 to tell ( High
word and prefix).
fl (final) Tin to tell (to princes), mn law court,
no artifice, m wra private soldier, (jn UJ
fruit, wm auspicious, ijrun to fix a price,
un low, glhun place, address, rH^ prize,
reward, lil mn, sugar, m Win lewd fellows
of the baser sort', enum to swear upon
oath.
fl (final) ibsmw notice, fnmpi climate, fifl point
of the compass, im sex, W»m French, in
halfanatt, ibsiYIR country.
( 159 )
v (final) imt male, im slave, lliu ptmishnient.
9lflU wonderful, dfliqu English rvrvnu
paper ^ira special.
i UiRm clock, ^1 hair pin, Igfin or 4n half
T
an att
t] n[]H Malay kriss. nqu vernacular, ^HntjU
English, ^IWhC]^ Sans t]p season, iJqmn
to deliberate, iJimTj^ behaviour, 4ii NCjVlffljrt
Thursday, fm Ificfml^ Jupiter, WjwnTaJ May,
• wqW^htJU November.
tj] r[] — vrfb *or', or the sign of a question
tjjS hermit.
f] Tf\ deep Tqn remembrance.
JW l^ rp notorious.
A list of the more common words having a
silent final consonant (karan) of with meanings.
«
3 flm conch shell trumpet Tin3 misfortune.
wSlradog.
( 160 )
n fMPi Designatory Particle of Royal personages,
bTwr tunnel, ibrwfl desire.
^ VKXm Buddhist priest.
71 miUTl conscription
m iffipiu plentiful, wnvojnf Brahmin, dn«iir
behaviour, code of laws
n l«vilJW top knot cutting ceremony,«mrniW sol^
new year festival, ikw]^ manners, be- ^
haviour.
tl tiwm snuff.
T
B qVHI power.
Vl QSJSUn steps, stairs.
U llrltfilU use, useful, ItflW 400 sen,
W njrmiJu Royal Mint, ITMU sermon
fiunu * amusing, pleasurable.
tf
W %m print, type.
a*
U 9fa\ poison.
(161)
U im^ pagoda, IrQllliffiK Post office,
yoscnfiPU the Sun, vfUm a week, ^ true
rm hiti pupil, scholar, mm mankind, yi^nej
property, InntJ *the Earth VK&ffS King.
7 ^itfff sacred writings SUlilhr bank note
W IJTff Saturday, WW IBSlSTr Saturn, id SUYI?
Monday, WKSUVB the Moon, sh? machine,
engine, ims diamond, ^ seven tiered
umbrella, um son or daughter, fllOillWITarea, .
IWW imi boundary,
' Q ^ animal
U mu giant.
fi vm swan.
c'
M inrai chance, fortune, !wnvi patience,
perseverance.
There are many other Pali and Sanskrit
words having a silent consonant at the end, but
the above list includes all the words which are in
common use.
Words marked * aretisuaUy tvritten without the silent
final conaonant.
( 162 )
Foreign words which have been incorporated
into the Siamese language retain their spelling as
far as possible
To express European names in Siamese
characters, uie following points should be noticed.
(i) The spelling in Siamese should be strictly
phonetic
2 For TransUteration of the English con-
sonants use the following Siamese consonants.
R
U
C (hard) 11 or n
G (soft) 1
Ch (hard) n or n
(Jh(soft) II
* *
D v^
F i .
G (hard) n
G (soft) CJ or s
H a
M
N
Ng
P
Ph
W or iJ
Q m
R (initial) 1
S H
Sh
T
V. W
H
cm )
J Oor
^
Y £J
K n or
rf
X.Z. 5
For the Vowels.
A as in fftth^
i ■ •
1
I as in his
A as in fame
I
I as in high I
A as in hand
U
short, between 2
•
»
consonants
A as in hat
•J
e.g. Tom. fl YIBJJ
A final short
h
long as in so .
E as in hen
u
Oo short as in book t
E asinsee
A
Oo long ... boot u
U as in cue lb
U as in hut ^
The sound aw^ should be represented by
f) after a consonant or QO (initial).
The sound er should be represented by l ♦ oj
(final) or iT. when there is a final consonant.
The sound eer should be represented by ittl.
The sound ow should be represented by ui.
Final iy as in my by L
(164)
3. Never use (i) the high class consonants
(il) the rarer consonants 1} T etc. » in transliteration.
4 Final consonants of the nature of •K. P.T.
should have the karan e^.
5. Initial St sc. etc., should be written thus:
e.g. Scotland
Smith
9f
xnomiinw
kStT
The following is a list of words which the
Siamese language nas borrowed from European
languages.
flKMIH
paper.
Portuguese.'
carat.
English.
noi
copy.
English.
muil
coffee
•
French.
niTnifiB
director.
English.
\B^
brandy.
English.
IJOEJ
boy, servant
English.
fin
bill
English.
ifn
shirt.
English.
^
boot
English.
( 165)
boom of a ship.
English.
uiMrf.
bank.
English.
luw-
boat
English.
lihvi
private
English.
uikni
surveyor's plan,
English.
Hu
pin.
English.
liJ«n
police.
English.
(i)
European.
French.
(i^iivi
French.
French.
1*"
foot, 1
foot rule 3
English.
ueiu
monsoon.
English.
SSif\
minute.
•
English.
vivahi
Mrs.
smart, well dressed
pound, ft. or £.
English
(ma'am.)
English (gen
tleman.)
English.
tiRn
receipt
English.
(166)
%1 week. English.
I
iRu school term. English.
foJ soap. Portuguese.
fthmn flannel (properly red English (scar-
. ^ flannel). let).
lflij>in hotel. French.
fjOfAJpi ofiice. English.
IfilEAl agent English.
9f
IIWDIII postage stamp. English.
WVI salute (of guns). English,
and many other technical words.
Example of an Int^linear literal translation of
an easy continuous passage of idiomatic
Siamese with English version.
( From the First Siamese Reading Book. )
vaaim ^ vA^ \hi v\ \9m
Rabbit thing one spoilt l^g walk
A rabbit which had hurt its leg and could
Tii W UDU flti In pfu TjT
no can, sleep was under tree
not walk was sleeping undei* a tree.
(167 )
iivH vitb uic pK vlfb i^
place one goat thing one spoilt
*
A blind goai was walking about to
m ihi vn ifkn vn fhi re;
eye walk come on pleasure tolookfor toeat with
look for sometkifig to eat with its /riends.
ihm WM ifciu i?lu 111 Iref
friends miss the way friends walk go near *
Having strayed /ram its JriendSy it
vaahi rmvTCj ivlu utc in n
rabbit Rabbit see goat come (so)
went near the rabbit. The rabbit saw the goat
nfc ss 4 vnl n 111 Tji
fear will run run away (so) no can
coming and was afraid, btU could not run away.
m llfl 111 m lUC l^ .
enough and go see goat spoilt
Presently it saw that the goat was
m . n rt Is vru nrfj
eye (so) good heart (glad) cured fear
blind so it was glad and was no longer c^fraid.
m
( 168)
* "^ ' fh ft n
S4 ro Tn vn Ti f |
then put occasion to make which fierce to tiireaten
Then it put on a ^erce threatening look
lilTiuulmssjn wi ftwu
go say there who will come to look for at death
and $aid. ** There ! who is coming to seek
(sign of question)
deaih ?
IIYC
goat (sign of past tense) hear thus that (so) fear
The gout hearing this wets <nfratd^ and
^ QQU QOU 71 "M flth «m W
then soft ask often say ' please do not kill to let
then begged humbly saying^ ** Please do not kill
ITKJ UKJ flij «C UfDJ uJu in
die at all I will grant to be I
me, it is only /'*
V thj PM iS fl nt?i
Rabbit glad let goat enter come near
The rabbit was glad, cUlotved the goat to
( 169 )
n Su ^ vdi lut
(so) got up to ride back goat
approach^ got upon the godts bdckj and rode
iifi 111 lu ih
enter go in forest
of into the Jorest.
It will thus be seen how very diflfereritly the
Siamese sentence has to be turned to make good
English, Hence can be deduced the golden rule
for translating from Siamese to English and vice
versa ** Always translate one sentence in Siamese
by the corresponding «m/^ic^ in English and do
not translate word for word/'
( 170 )
MISCELLANEOUS SENTENCES
FOR TRANSLATION.
The Exercises from No. 44 onwards should
be used at the discretion of the teacher, as soon
as the Student has mastered chapter 20:
The words will be found in the Vocabularies
at the end of the book * but many of the common
words which the Student is supposed to have
already leamty have not been repesvted in the
uenerai vocaDuianes*
The Student should have plenty of practice
in Readmg, and in Dictation.
For dictation, the easier passages from the
First Siamese Reader may be used.
Exercise 44.
READ AND TRANSLATE INTO ENGLISH.
1 iiu 3D1J 3UJJ iJTi 1171 auij tt]
3 4^ IJ ifnu fhlu^ )n eru
6 uonnuliiiffHTnulliicnJriinin^
7 »nnUvnu%)ui^W
r'k - «d
(171 )
8 ifJB nui TnulliTi] inu nou lom filiM iih
f
10 ijonnuilijnilvlvi^ftd
Exercise 46.
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1 At what time do you get up in the
morning? 2 He cannot write very well 3 You
will go home when the carriage comes. 4 Have
you lost your hat ? 5 If so, you must go and
find it 6 Will you have dinner with us to-mor-
row? 7 We shall be very pleased to come.
8 How many persons can sit in that boat. ? 9 I
do not know, but I think four only. 10 I did
not hear what you said just now.
Exercise 46.
Read and Translate into English.
1 uni^iAiTKiJuiniiilyi^^Qii
2 ran'BiivimiiiniJvisinfllvni?
(172)
3- iwSflussTiJvnifeTiwThu, ii^uss^l^WEl14D•
6 Tnuunf^iunemliiqji&lii'Ui
7 ^Ivi M afM ivirn iili] fl inu ^
9 jijiidunnlvig'illuliJifbiliilfi
10 iihi.fcb Vnlii ay fc •] lilli
Exercise 47.
Translate into Siamese.
1 Tell the servant to light the lamp.
2 You must write this again. 3 Go and find that
book quickly. 4 Do you want to see my father ?
5 Your hands are very dirty, go and wa^ them.
6 I am very tired this morning. 7 That is
wrong, you must do it again. 8 Wl^ere did you
find this book? 9 There are no txees in my
garden. 10 Take this letter to the doctor, and
wait for an answer.
( 173 )
Exercise .48.
Read and Translate into Engush.
1 i&i7iuiilnj1lilil7KJuiinu'lupmfM
3 inumtJiviu llllvwllwmflfw•
6 fnu fii ikmu butij iilw w^ tfi •
6 ifc flu 8 iiBU fnwawn triiliJ ifttn m
7 In WW in m 1 iffelii wtJIj
8 iftlvl acH Tnu uflu in rrh iflblvl ^'^
» ixn iSrillu J) wr rnu raui vn llu lotn idu
10 in ft iiu %) ui lilQ d ntncj 9 mil i^ lun
Exercise 49.
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1 Can you give me change for a tical ? 2 1 will
not take it all in att& 3 Bring that bill again
on the first of next month. 4 At what time
does the train start for Paknam ? 5 I do not
know, go and look at the notice. 6 Is there any-
( 174 )
thing worth seeing in tiiat town? 7 I have
forgotten your address, please tell me again.
3]! All people should learn to swim while they are
young. 9 He does not eat much, but he drinks
too liiuch. 10 What do you wish to see me
about?
Exercise 50.
Read and Translate into English.
1 lufiuuutiditouftvin)?
2 Yhu!)ihnmi^i^?S)llirifFK
3 1\ m fs^i m ^ i'iien? t m m ni
4 mij ivwi ifi Tfi fcb ay ft d ?
6 lilloiinWliJfnuu^mWLviuwinfjwniJ
9 flu liTfiu uEi 4fi rau ufw^bi im ss wn ii«n
10 j|jitnufi^4^iiiriLraxmiinn*i-^1iJi(fu7n
( 175)
Exercise 5L
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1 I am- writing letters, do not disturb me.
2 What is that blacksmith making ? 3 I. shall
buy a new horse the day after to-morrow.
4 I received a letter from my brother yesterday.
5 Will you take a bath this evening? 6 Do not
eat sweet cakes in the morning, 7 I have read
that book many times. 8 My father has paid
away all the mon^ that he had yesterday. 9
The gardener is planting pretty flowers in my
garden. 10 I drink coffee in the morning, but
in the afternoon, I prefer to drink tea.
Exercise 62.
Read jam Translate into English.
1 ivn lai ^ nu iniiiilif fiij luu tin lain
'3 rnulvii^iiiifeurapft
5 (miiin9Tuw&Qhnr#iunl«j^
( 176 )
10 Ifvithliitfilum^il Idilul^miih
Exercise 63.
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1 How many bottles of wine are there in
that box? 2 Please bring me some blotting
paper and a pencil 3 How many carriages are
there rin the road ? 4 If you have plenty of
money, you can buy that house. 5 This curry
is the best that your new cook has ever made.
6 Did you keep many horses ? No only two.
7 Did you give those coolies two salungs each ?
8 No I gave them twenty atts each only. 9 How
many knives did you buy this morning ? 10 The
elephant is mudi stronger than the horse.
(177)
Exercise 54.
Rbad and Tbanslate into ENGLlaH.
2 m ihu fhi JCWM Flu •) ihu ro ^ isu irm
3 fn (Ju (VI ihulu whIiIIviu
6 lebcj piu im tn i4ju ilu ^
6 vn TVtWu luiulil iiQ in ^lillii i^ iwi dkilii
7 ilufl^ifnlo'lu^li^rifii^rajnuffl
8 ^ jyirmii fnvra iws lun ivirc mi %1il uou
10 iTiutm ^ 71 4(1 S % itmtfi in VKH ^ ft inu
Exercise 55.
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1 Which of tiiese dogs did you sell to my
1m>ther? 2 Be careful that the tram-conductor
does not give you a bad salung. 3 The thief
was arrested by that policeman for stealing
clothes. 4 Which of you would like to come for a
(178)
drive with me to-day? 5 If you wish to live
here, I will build you a nice house. 6 While I
was having my dinner, the electric light went
out. 7 Having heard that your brother was ill,
I went to visit him. 8 If it were raining now, I
should not go out. 9 If you had run quickly,
you would not have been late. 10 If you ran
quickly, you would not be late.
Exercise 56.
Read and Translate into English.
Ivi jih Btm ^ ft «w iin in ^ ntl^l^f Mu i
2 rnlluifnwBnlijwfin ft rw Ivl iin irwn
wi^vra YnuPHsrilf'miiSu^uin
3 4l[u?^«c1vivilfj^RfMi«ilviq)*^ S iin ynu
4 irm s: ni ikmu ^1 Ti iiJ«i "^ vifti? 'SiiintJifn
iiri mn !« mtj (t «TJj mm
6 uonsTnffiiLyifimnTwa;l?Snvife? % m
(179)
uen 7} no nuj ifo un lUEj u^ Ivi 171 iim
^ zmvSn fnulij uu urai lira ri^ S 111 !Sq !ln iilu
7 ^ j) lAou £j nth iiJu ^ ilijdb inn
n
8 i^ 5IM ynu flxjlii iiri rai laii^ ?sr iin ran
T
im m IS ^ rm MEJ
» mimmimmiim'hmii iffes jjm iin
Is^nr *^
fiftnfiwiu m
10 THU !) pmu ^ ni4 ^^ un {i4 !) pmu wn un
Exercise 57.
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1 He told me that he would answer your
letter next Thursday ; have you received any
reply ? 2 If the money has been stolen by that
man, we shall have to inform the police. 3 If
they are playing polo, I will go and watch them
at 5 p.ni. this afternoon. 4 He asked me
whether I had seen the new house which he had
built. 5- He explained to him that the i:nachine
was used for folding paper. 6 If your friend is
having his dinner, do not call him, I will come
(180)
lata: in the afternoon. 7 When I called at your
house two days ago they said you were not at
home. 8 The bill-collector said that the money
must be paid before the end of the month. 9
He jumped out of the railway carriage before
the train had stopped, and so he broke his 1^.
10 I have only a little money in the house ; so go
to tile bank and bring me change for this cheque.
Exercise 58.
Read and Translate into English.
1 iffi 111 W hhsu iPfn pu m iwrc nru li
3 ^fiuiMmiiflEjrniTnij^iiMfllifhJifijnn
mmi
4
iwi BMU iiJii ^ ft rhu MiJ inn mi iml ^ «]
uw iKj W« ynffm ^ vn mm fcwtEfM^ft dliiV
5 lu WW ft iwm im SJ ifff jnn ivlfe iftutjn jjiI-T
lu WEH UeiU RDJ fH
7
(181>
ikiAni^^^ifnmilbvifin
mrKiiRHnu
8 ifniKsnft^n^hifijnW^ifM^mwumifn
miiii ui V^ (Hi OKJ vsib H V
cn FID uJ FicH li*i In utKJ rm uu 9
10 lufiiij'lijilllrK^iiflJomiThrtii
59-
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1 What do you want these sticks for? I
want them for beating dogs. 2 What did you
buy at the market this morning ? I bought some
chilies and a duck. 3 How much did you pay for
that duck ? I paid five salungs. That was very
dear. 4 They told me that prices were high
owing to the Chinese New Year. 5 Are you
sure thore were no fish for sale ? I did not see
(182 )
any at all. 6 Tell the cook that if he does not
>
give me a better dinner than this to-morrow, I will
cut his wages three ticals. 7 I must really dis-
miss my coolie, I f oimd him smoking opium in
the dining room, 8 Can you tell me where I
can procure a Siamese cook, I hear they can
make good curry. 9 I wish you would tell my
gardener not to cut down those plants. 10 What
is the matter with the watchman ? I think he
is drunk. Send him away at once, or call a
policeman to take him to the Police Station.
Exercise 6o.
Read and Translate into English.
2 131 Liju rmrp ^ RiJifj ran phi vw vbjw lu Inn S
3 yhuilwtiJJTnivjflQUfltii^B LiJfh mv^^^
s: il inn nil ifhu mi iJTYi
4 yrm W fcl? un nu m vnu nu uu bu In
( 188 )
5 lu tra fl (te sow ifi TTTU JJ ftittu wio *i r^ ?
6 * iJo 7m 8 tItu V«m1yih piu fl On mi iinWiWaj
7 im liblTEJ ufl 7n iflfM (m cfiilu mvmm
8 yHu HBU qjini 1^ ? ^ nflu % Jim rai
9 lu iJiu uti !) lirm ft inu ? ig 719 PKKM !) fid vin
inu im [|| ^ nuu idn imi
10 nn^ifhTiuft'bnfeuuSlfldftpiu?
Exercise 6i.
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1 If I see you gambling again, I will fine
you five ticals. 2 If you had gone home last
night, you might have been able to have caught
the thief. 3 What are you waiting for ? Don't
you see I have nothing to give you ? 4 Mind
your own business, and do not meddle with that
of other people.^ 5 This man wants to know
( 184)
whether you would like to buy some old weapons.
6 If you fall out of that window, I think you
will certainly break your neck. 7 Where is my
inkstand? I think the coolie is cleaning it
8 Where does this tram-car go to ? It stops near
the Palace. What is the fare? One fuang.
9 Shall you go to the races with him to-morrow ?
Yes, and I hope to win some money there.
10 I think tile servant has drunk all tiie vrhislgr
and stolen my best cigars as well.
Exercise 62.
Read and Translate into English.
1 rh TPU minii iviDbu |^ sr d piu i^ iin Oij
fti ynu irm
2 in^if!XJii]u^!JEHriluinuii!tEHnHiniifl
3 tn ^ iiJu ivlfiou Ynu^m^ijon^mifrraj^
4 yhu w ^ iJ muj BTEJ ftVffe wn yi iilu dd jjm
(186)
5 idoimViJon^TiiinluiioijIiiifiuiiiTin^
n T t
iiiuuu
7 jnncH^oonliJiuni^PniThu fin ibviliq
ti
8- uiiuroliiVjfivnifhuiiluftiJcirani^P'feiTi
Vui ii!lo f«H enu <)fj U1 lu^
ivKnieivufin
Exercise 63.
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1 Have you been using my razors to sharpen
pencils ? If so you had better buy me some new
ones. 2 Has the washerman brought back my
white suits ? He has brought four suits only,
sir. ' 3 Look ! there is a mad dog. Get your
gun and shoot it before it bites anyone. 4 Tell
(186)
t}xe carpenter to make me a table two yards long
and four feet wide. 5 He cannot speak Siamese
well, because he has never learnt properly. 6 I
told you to buy a packet of matches, not one box
only. 7 Who is that man ? He is a trader.
What is he selling ? He sells diamonds and pre-
cious stones. 8 The roads are very dusty ; it
would be better if they were watered a little.
9 I want to go to Paknampho, which is the best
way to get there ? you had better go by train.
10 Tell the coachman not to forget the lamps, as
it will be dark before I return.
Exercise 64.
Read and Translate into Engush.
1 on nps S iiJu nn nojiw all ? mi lii niu iiw
2 iwny*^via)^Fmiiu^fcb?i5nijfin!hiffiVjn
sm ifiEH upiT i^ ^t itiQ m S
3 ntiu in w^ B i^ ifiw 131 ss fl^ UTIJ pifl£j yrm su
iQtnifivn
lu^f^
(187 )
4 fm ivini jm Tti^ fh fcTj ay ? iti s: spi iw
mrt ^ 8 iiiu ^ iTvi ?icM ifl V1Q4 ufH ^
5^ ft ]% uu mcj 304 iiw ivii^ ifhj rh Ynu I1J fi
ni mii^ ftifljjiJtiuuynupMssifj'ttitinTOi
AT II
6 ii!lQ^{i^viimei^^l]!i!)llqjq/ii{KJ 'illuiJBiiQrm
nu4u
8 uujiiwaLiiriuvifti? iijtri mwhmliJiinfimj
9 ynutnWjBy^lviu ? fiuayft ^n^ iifM-Sij
Exercise 65.
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1 Do you know if there are any houses to let
in this street ? No I do not. 2 That tree is the
largest I have ever seen in Bangkok, but I have
(188)
Men larger trees in England. 3 If you want to
know the time you had better ask a policeman,
or buy a watch. 4 Where did the servant put
the sugar? I think he put it in that cup-board.
5 What is the price of that diamond ring ? 600
ticals. That is too dear, have you any cheaper
ones ? 6 They tell me thata new school will be
opened in Bangkok on the 10th of next month*
7 Tell the coolie to buy a new lamp chimnqr ; he
had better take the broken one as a pattern. 8
This tramcar is very slow, why must it wait so
long at each passing place ? 9 I shouted to the
boatmen to stop, but they did not hear me. 10
If you go for a walk duringthe rainy season, you
had better take your umbrella with you.
Exercise 66.
RKAD and TiUNSIATE INTO ENGLISH.
1 ifhussndiiin^TnTO5irhifcilj?mifd^aw
Thui^)#B? wnlii tmi vrm iiJu ViS iiil
vihAvmi
(189)
2 im d sn ^ vifh TDJ fl i^ ufi iK uJu uun ^
m ^ itn rm uw ilh
3 ii(i^Wihui«n|jJnTiii!iijnl\i'*j'W'itfD?Tfhu
rrii iS fd fl inu vtm wk
iffi Vfl mi
6 C^u fl ^ W Wiiri vti iwa mi iti W lifvufiTil
uro tItu lin 71 wn «c ftj »#B iilfh ft sr fti W^
7 lidliiC^iifflimiYhuannss^intjHuiaiv^
un riou yhuTji V tiiu imTiiiJu piuls ^ jrm rrii
(190)
8 171 iii2\evi rfij im iiJu nu ifi 1^ c^iiJufl J) Qntn
iin iKi V i^ ^Pivami fnu niKi (hn 111 fk im
10 olj^ifnujnriiinsrlMriwll^ufiThu
Exercise 67.
TRANSLATE DW) SIAMESE.
1 Last night I saw two snakes in the road
in front of my house, one of them was black.
1 think it must have been a poisonous one.
2 During the hot weather you should not eat so
much meat ; it is better to eat fish, if you know
that it has just come from the sea. 3 This curry
is not hot enough. Tell the cook to put about
three times as many chilies in the next one he
makes. 4 In Siam we never have any snow, but
they say that hail fell once about five years ago.
5 Look how dark the sky is growing ; I think we
shall have a heavy thunderstorm this evening.
( 191 )
6 Walking is not pleasant, in the streets of
Bangkok, because most of them are rather nar-
row, and there are so many carriages and rick-
shaws^ 7 If you cannot buy me a box of those
cigars at that shop, go to the hotel and ask them
if they keep them there. 8 Why are all those
people dressed in white ? They are going to a
cremation at the temple near your house. 9 The
thief who stole my hat, has received three
nionth's imprisonment 3 Where did you find
that umbrella ? I found it on my verandah yes-
terday. Does it belong to you ? If so you had
better take it away with you.
Exercise 68.
Read and Translate mro English.
1 itiB iQtn uu im Wajj m vtcm m mart vm h
T
BU sr ndii iilu iviflauls m
2 IwWifDj UTJJ L^ Win? mm 5ifMmii?^iai
h
s
r
4
p
I
,11
(182 )
in iiox v& ijon nu VliJ io r% iiH Sn
8 Thun(»sb?uJehYh1iJThu^HUi^iiifiQU
liio Vivlu d uJtn ^lij uJu sb im uJu ivi
i%i 1^ On viUEEi iifh "Si
unr 171 % uJu piu d oiuis um
6 lilfl ti nmci Jin fliu nu mi VliJ ikim ^^tt
171 % ntflj ii!)Ql} ? ^ 111 f\M m ^ An
n
7ii7irastflyfliil4!!nei£Ntln7i
6 di^^nrm^fltiuuimiriwifitraljPliJpi}-
liCH ^m ui rii4 inu 9 yfiu ivni eeb ? iikfi litu
i^ enu nu ratm rtij fiy inh mi
orMljpljiYiniissTiJBTuig 7\^Tmm\m
isnlsi Vpiexj fl d iiJu oIj tvi
8 lite i^rfeuStJjjW 111 iflojfi^nWw Will
lire ivvi fcb? iwnr im ti cjulii mru
t I
(193 )
» lu iJnnfl i^nt|» ihi ft lai oy ifi i5n fe wi iiJu
tifflj nfM Piu tfi Ite TiTai iSlTw lal inlu ifru uu
w iQU im ^ nj im me ^ Ivi m ikm inu uu %;
10 iJTuflilnuuLiflitBu'ljififrwjfnj'^min^ vfe
inu fi 11111:1 4ur BfwlelWn vm betm ^ bej' jbu
T tl
b d <4 M ill
Exercise 69.
Translate into Siamese.
■
Hi
1*
''ft
■ : 1
tl
1 To-day it is raining hard, I suppose Mr, '^
b'W
Jones will not come to visit us this afternoon.
He said that it was quite possible that he would
not come if it were to rain. 2 Tom has no spare
time to finish your work ; you must finish it ^"^
yourself. Do not waste any more time, but
begin at once. 3 What shall you do with all the
money that you won at the gambling house last
night ? I think I shall take it to gamble with
again to-night. You are very foolish, you will
(194)
lose it all if you go there again. 4 In Siam
there are many tin mines especially in the Malay
Provinces. Most of the miners are Chinamen,
but the mines belong to European Companies.
5 Did you hear that his wife died last night?
No I have not yet heard about it, what did she
die oft The doctor said that it was typhoid fever.
6 Those houses are very old and dirty but they
will be pulled down next week. Will they be re-
built ? I really cannot tell you. 7 The mice
have eaten all the cheese that I bought yester-
day. To-morrow I shall buy a good mouse-trap.
8 Are there many patients in the new hospital ?
The doctor told me that, at present there were
twenty-seven, but that none of them were
seriously ill 9 Where can I buy a pair of spect-
acles ? I do not think you can buy a pair to suit
you in Bangkok ; you had better order a pair
from London. 10 Yesterday evening, when I
returned home, I saw that a table cloth had been
taken away from the dining-room, I asked the
servant whether he knew who had taken it, but
he did hot know anything about it.
!••
It
Hi
I
9
I*
(195)
Exercise 70.
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1 When you go to the market, be sure not to
forget to buy all the different things which I
have told you to buy. 2 This book is very small,
I want a larger one. Have you any about one
foot square with good paper and a ruled
margin P 3 Do you ever smoke Siamese cigars ?
No I find they are much too strong for me, I ?
prefer to smoke cigarettes. 4 What is the name
of this flower ? It smells very sweet. It is very
similar to a kind of flower I have seen in
Prance. 5 In Bangkok there are many Indians
who sell cloth and other things in the street "^
Do you ever buy from them? Yes I have
bought a few things, but they charge very high
> 14
prices. 6 Yesterday I ate some ice cream, I -j
think it must have been made from canal water, ••*••
as I am feeling very ill now. Please go and
fetch the nearest doctor at once. 7 Do you
ever bet on horse races ? Yes I sometimes bet
a small amount, but have very rarely been able
to pick a winner. 8 I should be much obliged if
I—
' J.
it
(196)
you would kindly lend me your newspaper,
when you have finished reading it 9 This lamp is
very dim. Why did you turn it down so low ? I did
not turn it down I think there is no oil left in it
10 Let us call a carriage and go for a drive.
Where shall we go ? I think it would be pleasant
to listen to the military band which plajns in
front of the barracks.
(197 )
EASY CONTINUOUS PASSAGES FOR
TRANSLATION INTO ENGLISH.
Exercise 71
rmih aw ^\9m ttm
tJj j1 w awlaifln fiu ntfa i ww innlu m? ft sr
ti
ij!lfl wnWfiu &j urn w atw laira W jn ifn wu m
fnvny d invi tfi^ ytm pm mi oi VhTu ^ d uivi m aivn?
•»
II-
IT
l>
9
Th u'vdfc ^*''U 4 D^' lu Tallin aw wn Wi^ ilu uJu
rili ym "Jli Mil^ i) ^"'iflu ma mi vd^ ifc rmih i^hi wfi jji
lu WW fii fnvnj lai Witn niriihlij mi tm V im irfS !
Pfi vlifc lire m Wuj uu irf^ Sn i^ ntl^ ia fd Ijj mi
•••
«4
\
• •«■
XI •<>
t
*»
*'
lOTjjwi to UTVi iTP miljilii vl5a i«n awlaipw piflu 'ii
"4jf iieiiniminjriihaflJifhu'liiuuiv&iuuTuSnnu ^
wth imr rasiih mi b^ uu iffS" tT i?hi ym piu mi n
UBU W^ <£ inn mi iin ww ilkw pm Wpiu 4u W Ciu
u
iS wifi Ti " pj 5 -^ i^ ilii phfTMU efivn!] nriih aw mi
luw iwrc -mm rusiih m Mnmi toej" lai W lilw
(198)
v6irt\nj^mm uen sm i^ ^KHlaim nu i^
Exercise 72.
iRUQ rfiJ rtii ijh iluu Piu fl (KM un iluu pm fl f^nQulSi
cju ftn 71 uhi lib K(i$) SKN itslvi'' fV iJPnDJNQls iiJu
diiinnlumjftTJfiilEnjnuuuWijpiilfwS iinliiV
tMlywuniiifiiJtJumimi m^WmuiiifiiltJUPni ft
ffiH 71 "fnh ifH VI in" uYi iluu uulii f ti ss wbij
otmIj itfi wn fi« 71 s: ifh itw ViviilBU Ti*ii ife atM
iTniltJu mivda iwrc nuu im IpTp^ di cju piecj miiifi
ilou piu 8 TiJ life till M ni "
( 199)
Exercise 73.
{(ivlktiinEjnuylA^^fnuivi^ifiulilifkjQdfB
vi^frnmEJPiunlkflliJnt^inEj in vpi rHi u'mej nu
inu iK 71 '' en dfo rh 9 ^ i^ iin {ifj in yS eiEM %; iilu
fnvni'lii'iJmflu ihu ^i ti lim *c fhi 1m riou " inti
iSupiui]unwBiJ7i"iJmi«iiJuiJfli srntc w^ flu 9ri
!ifH tii4 rJEiu iiJu uu un iJm fi hqu fiu Wi fom ph s: ftu
^Thuriciu''
f
t
B II I
I
Exercise 74.
fi-mtj Piu vith ^ iiJu nu ^ itu im' !) pmu fKrvi
vm' fw vrtfa wn Wwj ifeuafw lai iIpiu 4 iiJu nucMn
TO vufi ik i^ UTtj w flu vliJiWwi ti "nalyiH m i!j
U 11
uuTjiWivlu yhu rimi iwrc ti tHu iilu ru life iiyf •^'
-I
'J-
.1
i*
\}ki iw 'mv\ ^
*•
(200 )
m Ai Piu mi Vmnj 71 "*hi iilu f&, tju iiiu ivdisa ilu
Jj rfn lyh Tfli nti ffj ivimi^ w VB« ''
!Ezercise 76.
vfiu im la yifM
!Bfwwn*K h\ TiiaiLihitJilunjinnrKn wm
hi*] lulfln mt vhu ^ vitl^ 551a iiJu YRM Tli re;
vhm lu Tp "TKi ivtrc mm lai km rw a yimj inn
iiJurm^ wftiliitfi^ni vhuafMini^i^ sr Imsila mn
iaBEjIuyifMafMvhu fiffltm i^Wvdjm iwrdittiin atrirw
iihiimuj in wfw «ai vnii atw in i^ ifc ssWifnlmw
^ il f]^ lu vifH vnu mi i^ Ivi vDFi ^h\fmi'^^
vlftiljj" liJu nlw oajjlii iiJu m? ^ iin lai 1« «ai vnu
(201)
^ mi lib likiiinn'luficHynuuuiini^ffiHi) pmu
Mm
imum 11^ vhu ^ *] YifH nlii D inq vhu n PTU i^
m iifl ratiJ iin nliiTpila iiJu raj Sn iiJu flu mw
vem il in iiro D (wIn vitl^ a^ lu dn (mmi i*ri
afw twmi iilupiu iivMH ivn'] 'Hiviii ife lai fn^ vtm
Exercise 76. •
1
m
u
'■t
■I
I
^ lolu iJiDj^ iiJu ph lilfl Imun fhi i«jjfl lai Wtnu
ifditm 01 "i^S 4i£j «ivifii fclj wEMifa lunfe gk) Mt
dujnn iriiifEHjJlil'f8hmisijvnj^«cyhif4fMtw i
r u
ifijl'Tyhlu
(202 ;
Exercise 77.
Ulfl «H Viffl^ cT^
^vi^ nuvifbi)uiflTiu}jinp^iid4^ imdranj
if\vm jl4vlihuu)»f!iuuliJll4i(iulucnuaeHinEjnu
v(k flu KOJ van im ivMim fiu ui 84 um ^ tSflii'
iAdu ntH im VKTU nulii'"^ vnj ^ mu uti^ itlQ im 4(i
IvTviumicj^ ^Vj^nuuuVifnviijlvi^uiliJvifh
iifl m itn vm M lu raj ivmm \.v\w m nub m m m
liJiKliJfli/fuiifHuiufl'brtkimQiKHiin irupiui^
j) i!)tj ^ ir^ viu ivi^ iftu imir fiuu i^m uia V
i^^wMiSJumiliTiiul'liJiifl^iiTrmf'iTi D^ikh
^•jfldlui'liJiiluiifWTtnlli iflo Ru'laTw'ifn i^ uu in
flinu ittw^vosimmilinii^ im viu n rarlm fign
vow im 55 nnjj wnls vm im W«wWi^ pfi viu
(208 )
(hn viu ncH ^ Vim iiJu 3fH unn iiJ2kiu rfij p&"
Exercise 78.
itib ivlfc ifhi
fw vlfh j) nu i(Tu rm piu vifhliJ ifkn mu 1^ uon
fmi imiriuufin'lurtiijni£inpiNlfiurti4mitipni
■ n
irainuifflnfitiQuWiinfljj ru wiu nn mi WiiJinj
^ mi WiiJu I'w UTYi vi4q iifl Tw £5u um uu IfTiw l?b
Iw TB UTU lifm Piu mi iJn^iraifiuufln'U'trwTi
ira ifiu uon mi mi n vtlij tlu inifiiffil«lunnihiiflwwgri
(204 )
Exercise 79.
AN vlib iS au ifH <« SivnJuj um laiVTilvnira
sruu'MmiraMTni^TipnEjmjnjnJi'lu nwM iwn iian
iifl mn cn^ lu d) van iim itam u'M'wu imi^
t
^ 'JT« WEM mj wu ihlj im i^ jil rau fi sr WEW
mr i3u mi inn Tsavm imJim uu lii uqjj Wilu »tt irm
im il WW wals sslvi'vTijQtj utyi iytiuu stji^ jiJ Inw
%j t c/ d^ i^' f h
un IIP) rruj VKM n w rjBu ifli ren wm uu erj in an
u
«TiJ -ili iTH i^ Jii Wpiu laTiJ ijfln au u-M 'h JiJmw uu
u t ti
^irsiun suuT^iiPiTiJiiJjnifrw'ls'lumjftnJfnHUU
T tl
tt tl
mw mi lii'iai ig m IpTlviu iJ iiw mafnu ytt^ iisn^ irimi
tl
jiJmw "BW mn iiw mi" 3u uiq Wtnu §n ti "win nan
(205 )
9ni\hi'[umxiVf\fW
Exercise 80.
rmwnfnufltrH'lvDi
!» t t n
lih iwir •jw^muTEJTwmiEJsslilw flan i^Wtai tin
^mlili^ ifessliilii'uitJTWvitrKJiSjJpnTjJN
ifbs wi'^PiuVfiBn^Wiin iw nu M TDU Piu mi
fiWinftlfliwnmiwBliJiiTiiJT|n^ flu wife i) uio piu
. vdo uan 71 " iih aflEj mi W^ ffe «i^ vmi iwtw iwrc
iMii iWTS fil:j iiJu ffiTj" fw M THU 71 m iih afblii
T
illu iifl aREJ il^ lun rou ^^ mi uu ign 71 ^'luiilu ccb
^flmnsslij" Piu 510 ynu RQiJ 71 " m fiTM mi tju raw
( 206 )
tSirtimiuyiViii cjuiihan^liiuJuinEj vufiB
n T
Exercise 8i.
lun HfM u-u wnj
Ww PwWmfn life «h iJoupf vrf^ jJiWiurifhi i«n im
mi WsJjirw w 71 luw afw wn tJEw nri iiei riou iin W
u
iJm fluliTin trw 71 " iw Wiai lua uiWiun fhi ip 'iii
MTU f^ «w )^ iijtfi " nu liTrau 71 " cju iBi in Wi«ufl
OT^" u'wrnmnTiii^ im ^n ti nuliHM'inij wu
TfivnjWsM nuliTifn wrm ui ifta amn srf ti van pnmi t
U
iJiviuniYnb iMm no m img uu urn i^ibi iviu iujq m
i&^^m^^)km\hn Ru'lirufln7i"gf Mfijuu
(207 )
Vq?! PTW wuj iilu €^ tjuWlii^iiiD im IIW ^ ijflwf
A d^M- mum mi 71 <<tM iihj liloilkj iW
Exercise 82.
^ nw pw sn fliWitj
uormi inn ^1u ^ilm ft utm i^ il iilui^ inn:
p
[
I
I
I
I
I
b
r.
I
il LwuliJ lAn mu ih itei^ i A^'imu pJj viin ih i m
X)
vnnihfilji'liJsTnlpiumi TiTiS ikifeQ i5n Vfin -h
%; ncH iih il tih vniou iUlf] von ihVSu i^ !li mi im
fi vjdliJ i^ vow im ^ nmi inuWlwEj flwjn
(208 )
83.
imttitiiiuiliJSJfJuMnlviqj lai Wimu Tallin >nn*i
vKi^ vd^ n iinli] i^srotjnvl^uQutfii^vifi^ il
flu ay' ft uu vwitj piu iwir m 8 w afMlaifin uan ti
iinliJlum] imimi aoAaiPhiSi iw igiirt^ jjumq^iIk
D r > r
m m ^ Tim iHi vm itsi m Im ipmrvT^ fi '^ i) ilu
fxJluriKiihi^afN^iJM ni(iul}iein1viqj'ii[jpM
^ ntfiHiJ vn tH uu inrttv\ajlH'fsl\)imi}liimvpf]
r u
t t
ifcpniYHWtrioimiuviWflQnTiJiTiTOi'^uliiuu t^
ft«w i»rc ivw 71 nrw fiRTi MM lA rm ^Iw^tfvJfM
t t
(209 )
Exercise 84.
unuHonnim
un 11^ ^ iSj iilu un mm im mmn nsm^ iSi rbu
tl u
iifnmi litre 91 ijul^f^ivKjiuieM) 171 liifKJin^ircj
iwrc mill io un lun fij rm iiiM wn ^i 71 s: ntw
vnijun lira jw Til IwiiCTvimij^WBTiJ lotnlwiin lira
tl
w Bsbljj mjfflj m n lai unlwlu wwod iMtiu itHn
D B T I
jd nfb lib un iif^ e|i1u veq 111 nu uu iiii n liSm ibtsirli
^ iiln iin lufl 304 u ^ nu & Lisnai ui i^ '^uniira n
UB4 in img im wi if^ ifl^ Su q'i ''^ imQ ^ iiu] nn mi
n t
IQo'tt'l^ f^ Will ivflflu ^ Vl!b "
Exercise 85.
un lira viiji vm
fv^vith Sll un 11^ ^ viti^ fl iiJu ^liJEjiminn ^nfk
Ivl fbuuflCMtmnEHumjiAJ i^iliunlimiimlvl
( 210 )
ivn i m urn 111 Suf^ii iiutfwufnii]}ni^}m1ii
vd^ 55 § ^ iiri 1 piu vitlj jn »n isi ufw un i^ igm lai
l«irh mwi j^ij un lira n iMU ^ 5ifM u rt iin 1 uu
nnu ^ & iiii T04 1!^ m^j i^mii^luQi "noij iinra
rnupiu wi im lotj ' iin if%j ^rluu wu OTOtlfiu iviJhm fiu
Exercise 86.
nu iBiiw JJ1
ibnniu foEJ ^ ui lu^ i) im iiwn «g) piu ^ uem rm
liJ vn ^ fhlu ik'.Yifl fiiiiffn life iinliJ t^ wu ^ Tii d
flfi ivikjqj VI& m vMfifwWfiw ^ s: vn ilu iTOj rni orw
BUM 8 UEWnWf1EWlfetll3fMl5ni^ iin^ViTi
n Ti warn uu jJ WW wbIs ^ sr Sq WEHlo'jTn do ii^
(211)
igm rwTM l^j iM^iitJ 111 i^ STi uiu ibri irm iSi iin
ilu Wflfjn iJirmpi 71 vWrwifi iiJu Sii irm iin t^vdi uh
rf^iBiTfnHuBnntijnW uwTiiSllTrofitnsstvnlj'i
Exercise 87.
•Jli vifij TiTtii tJu wn IviQJ uio iiw jji ft iriu aw uitj
mm" uiEj m n Imm tu I1J iwrc "JiJ uu liti 1^1 TjJ
fimn s3iJ ifb] rmm wa iiwlii Wiai iumwm
hi uri iraM ra in Sn -Jli vitf^ i) tlu pm IviQJ Sn vnu
rti filiJ mu uiti iim ite tw iu aw lan ifte inu wi in
Si irfu u'tj iiro lai wu uitj iiro 6q ijj mi uitj ifri tnu 71
''yhusrlijlviu ibi iw afw mi mi :n W^ ifw " utej
(212 )
• . t -
i4i iBiTiJTji V" uxj rti fi iJjsMtrwls jjin ivwoiuii
nu ^ ui fifi rifi nfi) "
Exercise 88.
a
laiVfH i^naw rwlvi'.fn amj lailvi «fri ^ vfih ifto im TpT
iinilu'ri"injjjiliiwiifl^iiifeif1ij" i^mMriulrM
iin 71 ^' ^ J 4h "^i & mjjj wi n oum riou utej
u r >
S MEW iihj awj fi ifhu Wfcli'lu lom rem ^fulKiflw jn
(218)
Exercise 8g.
nflft inn ifhlliJ
piNvifhiFffiicHcr^nuvifhi^ inn imimV
T n
vnvDjf)fl})^ilb]nfliuiifinnui&1}jfi mm
ff vnj mJ sio) lai V 111 ifjuj vdjo piu i% fl i/iu im
iJBn VWD91 "lu nu ft vwQ W fhm UFB MM ?\ ^ vnu
T
fcb iiJu )idh ft flunv iin vhu ^^^ttimwivuB
M vwfllpniJiw fii w inn "^lij fi ft ^ ii^ vwb
(noij 71 '' ^ iioa i2<n\ ftlu J) rimlij' iihi iMii rn: ft sr
^Himifi rwi^ flUM iflii RJJTO ifKJ " ^''vig^fflimi
filnn iifl mjJTivwfi^ifni'^uLifhli vworauTi
wn WW nu i5u soo uTifi iiJu m fhai i^ mi vnti tTviffl^
IrTiiti tM im y^wu lai juifo dli i^ V\m vwa iw
r
im ifn mUh Sn m oii milsl'Mu ti^ ft i5n Viffi W^
lurariihiuwnmnflyTiJ
(214 )
EASY CONTINUOUS PASSAGES FOR
TRANSLATION INTO SIAMESE.
Exercise 90.
There was once a poor man who had never
been to school when he was young, and he
wanted very much to be able to read. He had
seen an old man who lived neiar his house
reading all day long with spectacles. Therefore
he thought that spectacles would enable a man
to read. He went to a shop and asked for a
pair of spectacles. He tried them on and then
endeavoured to read a book which he had
brought with him, but he found that he could
not read it ; so he told the shopman that these
spectacles were not the right kind, and asked to
try on another pair. After trying on every pair
in the shop still he could not read the book.
The shopman said that he did not believe he
«
could read at all. The man replied '* Of course
I cannot, do you think I should want spectacles
if Icould"?
■ ik. _ s^
(215 )
Exercise 91.
A gentleman in India, one morning dis-
covered that a valuable ring had been stolen
from his room. He asked all his servants but
they all said that they did not know who had
■
taken it; so he said that he would have to use
magic to find out the thief. He told his
servants to stand in a row and said that he
would repeat certain words and that the thief s
turban would catch fire. He muttered a few
words and stamped his foot on the ground.
One of the servants snatched off his turban and
threw it on the ground. By this means the
gentleman discovered who had stolen the ring.
Exercise 92.
A wealthy gentleman who was fond of
good living and had for years been abusing his
stomach, at last found his health so bad that he
consulted a celebrated doctor He stated his
case so clearly that the doctor could not mistake
the nature of the disease. '*! can cure you"
(216)
said the doctor, '' if you promise to do just what
I tell you. '^ The gentleman said that he would
be sure to do so, whereupon the doctor told him
that he must steal a horse. The gentleman was
very surprised. * Yes' said the doctor ''you must
steal a horse, you will then be arrested, tried,
and convicted, and you will be placed where
your food will be such that in a short time your
health will be perfectly restored.''
Exercise gs*
YesterdiEty I went out for a walk. I met a
friend of mine whom I had not seen for many
years. I was very surprised to see him; but at
first he did not seem to be able to recognise me.
We went and had dinner together at the hotel
where he was staying. He told me that since I
had last seen him, he had been farming in
Canada but had lost the greater part of his
money. He asked me to help him to find some
employment, but I told him it would be very
difficult to find a vacant post just then. How-
( 217 )
ever a week later he received information that
he had inherited a considerable fortune from his
uncle, who had died a week or two previously.
I was glad to hear that, and hoped he would
remain prosperous for the rest of his life.
Exercise g4.
Two gentlemen travelling in Scotland, once
stayed for the night at a small inn. In the
morning they were rather surprised that one of
them was charged two shillings for his horse,
but the other was charged one only. They
asked the innkeeper why different prices were
charged. The innkeeper replied that the
horse belonging to the first gentleman had a
long tail, and therefore it could easily drive
away the flies while it was eating ; but that as
the second gentleman's horse had a short tail,
it could not drive away the flies so easily, and
hence could not eat so much, as it often had to
withdraw its head from the manger.
(218 )
Exercise 95.
A gentleman dining at a hotel, at which the
servants were too few for the work, sent one of
them who was only a boy to fetch a plate of
beef. After a long time the lad returned and
the hungry gentleman asked him if he was the
same boy whom he had sent to fetch the beef.
The lad replied in the affirmative. '* Dear me.*'
said the gentleman, ''how you have grown to
be sure."
Exercise 96.
Two friends who had not met each other
for some years chanced to meet again, and so
greatly had they changed in appearance, that at
first they did not know each other. During
these years the one had grown very stout,
whilst the other, who had been seriously ill, was
very thin and pale. When at last they re-
cognised each other the stout gentleman said
" Why Tom you look as if you had not tasted a
dinner since I saw you last?'* ''And you''
replied the thin gentleman, ' ' look as if you had
been at dinner ever since."
( 219 )
Ezeircise 97.
R »
"I shall work in my field to-morrow '* said
a lazy farther, ' the season is advancing, and I
shall have no rice if I do not worf Next
morning however he received an invitation to
dinner and accepted it saying ; ^' One day is of
no consequence". On the following day he could
not work as he had eaten too much and had a
bad headache. *' To-morrow I will make up for
this" he said, but on the morrow it rained The
next day was fine, but his buffaloes were sick, and
the following day was a holiday. Thus day
after day passed and nothing was done, until
the season for sowing was over, and when
harvest time came, he had nothing to reap. |
Exercise 98.
An elderly gentlemen was well known • for
his kindness to children. One afternoon he was
picking up an orange in his own garden, when
he saw a small boy sitting on the wall. The boy
did not know that the old gentleman was the
owner of the garden, and he said he would show
(220)
him a tree which had much better oranges on it
than the one he had seen him pick up. ''But'^
said t^e boy '^ We must take care that the old
man does not see us. '^ The gentlemen went with
the boy and together they stole a dozen of his
own oranges.
Exercise 99.
A Frenchman newly arrived in Lonckn, left
hia hotel one mornings to see the town. In
order to find his way back, he copied on a card
the name painted on the wall at the comer of
the street. After walking about all day he
called a cab and showed the driver the card.
But the cabman only laughed at him. At this
the Frenchman grew angry, and called to the
passers by. A crowd soon collected and every
one laughed loudly when they read the card.
Soon a policeman came along and the Frenchman
thought that now he was sure of help. But the
policeman only roared with laughter when he
read the card. At last a gentleman stopped to
(221)
see what the matter was, and as he could speak
Fr^dr, Hie matter was all explained. The ad-
dress which the Frenchman had so carefully
copied at the comer of the street was ' ' Stick
no bills''.
Exercise 100.
A boy once went into a baker's shop to buy a
twopenny loaf, and when he received it, he
thought it was rather small, so he remarked to
the baker that it was not of the right weight.
*' Oh never mind that " said the baker '* it
will be the less for you to carry." ** Very well ^
said the boy, and giving three half pence to the
baker, he went out of the shop. The baker
called after him and said that he had not given
him sufficient money.
" Oh never mind that" said the boy ** it will
be the less for you to count."
( 222 )
NEWSPAPER CUTTINGS,
NOTICES Etc.
From THE " Siam Observer."
N. B. — These Btxereiae firom 101-115 are jmt in aa
examples cf "Journalistic " Siamese.
Exercise 101.
mlwTiMiJ 71 t«nmyin^iwn ijfnitM i \hi
iiimmi iitn mx\ ^v^miixwh li^ mi m 'Mm
t t II
wn wiitM mm jJti wi oon 5ra liJ niryhlvl ti ft mu il
8
flinu fltw ««JEH fwi f^ jrin fw LSI ui ft PT3W nil w wn
ti
ufiKwrm jJ« ^ viil^ pw s: sulw mm ']m isi lii i
Exercise 102.
in Yinij Tfi 71 «jws wn^ nnmisfl w tji niu au
n . t
ffc«inilflnikimnKiTM i«^s sm ra iimljlwQ«ii)n lij tw
tu^Ipi iiJuiaipni \u nu www wtisi nr^ mam Iw toiij
( 223 }
ira raliJ 71 life tfwrni wtflw wrisi ra^uwinmuro^
it«j levN rrffu myiwi tl I'^muffW Yinu in ti iwr
Exercise 108.
ii!lQ^ \ d ilteu li i«n m*^ ifln to tu Su ^ mun
T
«WTUvin do PT^iiwn fe ira irm iflw nnnx nil m vatvm
ifmmi im'\u rb luinvih btTj Snntjviti^ enilfmnmn
yatrtfm 5ra will ^ Is itn ilw ^ nnmtjnffejij t!h
iJaniUQriiJuiujnwinsitivravn'lsn^ iiwirafi s: ynu
Exercise 104.
m fiuu is%momiiPi?ivnupiif)n ifriliifl] roonism
itbjiiJujwiSniviuia^fidiihj^ifiwiLVH w sm irm Is
(224 )
Sjlli^ifiiffu^nnfHt|)^if1ni)n|ii'lufl£isr1}i liVi
Snln iin fclslfwi sr iin irw cm rm ii« ram iJKanau
Exercise. 105.
Aq j|jfl()ibi^9iwiintJcn'lwimniri4lmjlMiiflu
lifiEjlli Twi in srm inKu vitt^ ife s:lil ^ luu iftiSu iwi
TM Sn 7N vilh ivi^ lun !1q iyH od tkh ilo irn uu uiej'm
ti
i:$ 111/
jS fnmj viffn irm ii« lomuu'tt wtuti um « leiw an ^
( 225 )
Exercise 106.
uii lun s: wi£j ratj fclj vn viruj lu lu mi S 55 % my
piu ft Bti JTW ROfw w 01 jan 8 iihj rw i^ pntj
u nun
Exercise 107.
life (^ ■ni wqwnj^ lotn f^ wo m,m fh«i lii ^ sti
wniu muutin^viH^^mfl^iuwpiufujn^vnlL3i
jSw S m PlwliJ #1 fllw #iiiJn fl ew wn ptki-ju ft tm \xm
u
TiJ fl^ilw ytnirw Tji 2u ■n 51 aimj vnlfi mr\
( 226 )
Exercise 108.
m\ Dill an 71 lu ni^ nou mm iTOj 111 9^ ki uQinor
lu iwi i9tu 31U tiuu fi m mm nfminrcD m UQiFiemro
l^dJ 111 W UU
Exercise. 109.
ifta i*hi Tiu il i«n iJnnm rw riu iflw ^ fiii lulu
t
tevrmnuaurarMlntj ftj ru "Wj eny ft wiun ikm i%
lan irilw5nQ!hiflijf™TwLemftif1«5ninfm8'lpi8u
5i7M'f|i ro^ ym i^ flsn vno m pw iisn fe n m Ivl m
Til flu i^ iTH lu nulmrjfnuljuuTiitJffliliJ ^ifbi
u
iiJu ihn i^ flii iu uitj «fM nu lii jti rw lom ifu m
ifij ui jti iviu' tHw i^ ffti la fcfe w & % w ^7^
. ( 227 )
111 ii4 ^muu iTvinn fiii %i fill piulraj (nu n ^ Dnfl
Tin ui avH U1U 4h tin In U3J nu u^ ^ ifn tiKn Iff ^
ti
ifvi on mu Tioej mulil intj ^ vid i^lillu fiu tiu un
tt
wivti erii%lwLflUP)rfvu4(i^lneHl74#iiim«c
llnw ^jlvi flw WD TiJ m urj ^jnu ^u jo Til uhj pwuj
Exercise 110.
5ra iJmj
i^ 6iin lotn ewH mu iFiu u piu riu «n y- go piu m i%
iSi ifini ihu iifl nidfe MM uTtj Inn oiiw ^u sinjo i/m
viufN 3(j ua« eninQ viucH rarll piu fiu itn A4 3Q) liJ Ipi
fD flu Su ^ 4bi mrln sou iwr iiJu m? uiu •& i^
lira fni fiu lu no^ ml ini wm lu^ rh vnilil vru mjuni
( 228)
uNilh wnirainuilnTiJJvrrwitfewiTiwnDiwnpiu
irw iiJu ftewim 'wnSfl£rwmt|p«iuii!nmi i^liJ
1x1 il § incj ilrni ilrnj nu fiu lu db ^Iykj
Exercise 111.
su ffu lijQjiiu
pTiii ^l^lu jrwM ^ 71 nam? iflw 1^^ tlhtj itjai
tl T
wn w rlu im nvrw itjariiu srlw flan sin ljJew ifb)isi
lui^UITTU
iwi ^ &lu uru: f^i^ nm 5 njoiilvi ^ pukj iin
T T
rt Su iwrc iwi i^iij ft UT] iJnwi «c »fi rlii in ^ i%
likH MM ^lo'iSi il ffe life Mi Th eHfvw arur 4u fvn
jm fpiiifej aTM FIB SJu Til OEOJ Ivi tl?i ifli JowifniYifl? l!i
(229 )
ivtuibuuliicKnn'ci^ii^'luenuti ^vnfiuLln
vmi Mil 'cfkm ^\hi \m ivox iivi omi itJonSii ^
t
tlDUTWTjTlJirW
Exercise 112.
^1 ffii mi
Aafu^ m]{imi^ lom mu imtj ^itu en. d piu n
vh linn fin 37] viBiihifi^vnnmii^wjikpiijflQiufin
ti
5173 mj wo nriTO j^iHi mj flti ^ mi n ifjw'^nifi pI fiij 3u
^ ro4 ikw nn wnw n iih un n^ iltjn wn ad lu
U fi
tMinj in^iin III lira ^ in^ inintjnumnutiKNfl'ynnyin
t n
9Km liiTw H vrtJliJiifllii lomSutl nu vm liJ ig iti pi
( 280 )
l^oy mn uim j^ im inu i!in ifc fc t% itiu JSi ?i In
nul^fffim 111 fill ^idiw^nD ifc %% IJn iJ»j
i^ u'vinDiiJupnivni^Tuffflonsn^iban^ Ta
D
ji^finnidafiindfiii^ftuTJu^nkSj^irijnod
irfi iiuR iifl lin li fni!^ mnls mu oi lu fl JSj
Exercise 118.
ikrnpiinejTKVimrviflin
m ftnjJuwrwwiiijjfiBulsifiS ww ^luciuJinn «n
fin fl ui afH ^incjlMim %i ft in iiiu vN ii^ itn
^{fH fj(i ^ fmi urfmm mm lib iWlioq^ ^
priiJfioniitBuiibnjitUGicioQii d^fiuvcniJnn
n
fuj} mi vilii YiKi m ih ttoi vHd f^ i \n tii vrid m mi
iivH iJk;uioi 6000 1? tiJuuivNuffl mn s: 1fi 3XJ TKVi
mvi i vf] m i Iw Id i }ai7i vnmM nn siiod i<xn
( 281 )
rwiiinli!ki^7i4i1\isilu(lrau. . un .ilU !ln enu
in §1« vtm s: TUTU pnuj rcifenlii TaJ truj uio Hu tm
Exercise 114.
VDJTtJU^flTIJJ
IviTOiiJ'h roiiw'JijSwBliJifSifissliitjaj'lwilfenfl
Ivl i^lii inlu tvm 1KH i^n i^Iq iiA.i!i \m^m
pw luw i^Yi ^ uQjj BU^ lun m inn "^ ft fm in ilotj
(282 }
\,MA fl'ttlu Qugpi m m iknq^ tm h ii^
IwlurtujflftiliftisfWB^vimEJfhlraSwfiijW^ ife
111 UU SS W«M l9hJ flETM fl ^ Wl ifel IjJ Ivi tffl fAu fh
T ^ B
Qurau iin i^ im Fi^ ^ pkich 1pi itlQ iiriu in iftou
s:; ^ i!b an pkkn % FifN qu^ i^ guitjil)^ 3ch i!^ m
rn ifti tri vri^ diln iJ:rwfi nu wi htm ihlvi iilu^
il^ vriEj QtrKln iitn isi nfH 13^ no^ iiJu cj ni (jn hqu
ti
i^i^Mi^k>i Jtt
( 283 )
Exercise 116.
iwprra
Iflihsi
IffMYI Ki iw m su
Ivi^ %m i inu vmn f^lnui tufu sum ^ nb nunn^l
101 fipi piQ 3VJ fiij ufuifi ttIvI im ntKH iTniQ nould mj
^ !Iq iiw ^ tw 111 iJi w miitjiil aaliiuilij uw
T
"Wj 1^ ?« ranjmj «fn
(284)
EXAMPLES OF SIAMESE LETTERS FOR
TRANSLATION INTO ENGLISH.
A. PERSONAL.
A
Exercise 116.
Prom a son to hit father.
9
IvinnjuiTimnjIn' lun raruu d ranj lih Ikn fllu S)
iwr m\ virxm ata ni ikmu i^ ono inn i^ 'elm
(236 )
Exercise 117.
Fromfathw to son; answer to No. X18.
ihnKKHntrvi
T
rou mu «vivDru m ^ ft mm i^ 9 <h fhrfiviun
m^ 'V w ih mo vfm ^ fOTU iwfi
mtfrnlu rru fl S2 131 rbuTti prw B Sm SJ muj
T
^ wi Sm ivm 71 LiJu nm ft UFW Im fe ft rfn tp ^^^
vfh iwrclfl m nrw lyn mi Omlw umi i3li mo inn wi
Xm RTEJ
(286 )
Exercise 118.
From Nai Tong Dee to Nat Som ( mutual frioids)
irwfh
<if4 fl iDe^ uoruu i^r^mm suds
mi IrmisiTw vn ft numjlu njq iwn tii SJ i«n
^■srjjnvnifhulw iwrc Pw nwm inn rnihuil i«n
srliJ nw iTfwn aa yhuTiJwi ii« ft um snww ife ss
lomci 8 iiwH pmu fh «i £6 ilnu
lilEJTKH^
(287 )
Exercise 119.
Magter to Servant.
iai«MinlvJnlvi?ijifnlQ lunifeliJjswSSsMSu'liJlvi
^^MjlviliJflfiui^fflim Ivi m liii 1^ vift) ^
111 imliiftflilusrnHiitMinuiilviiiflnnnvn sivny
ci m %J
lom icju ir^ fij ikvnu d m
vmmt
Exercise 120.
Formal Invitation to a dinner party.
«imiTH
^3\^
fonn ( s ) d PI70J Su^ HQ i^ yHu Slnmo} lunu
J w . t/.. t/ . *j A
wflitaTOJ «c 35 mj Jii ibrrrm flivn? Tiiiwraij
(238 )
Exercise 121.
Repiy aeoepting the above invitation.
inuTfjitj
Hii^mrm ]^lnlluriff>in st^
VL^m\um& iffnj wfitn ( s ) Yinu
mi amsi'te fii mpi nw ynu uiiij vrtl^ ^ m ifqjlij
«t V I (^ u t/ viu
ibrsm yi irm yhu uu m«n 1« yijtu iim jlnraSu^
vm ft s: in iJirmj fi iJTU yfiu
IfBTM 8 IWW WW UU^Q Ul tli yflU TOtJ
linisisf lunu
k** JUiidb •
( 239 )
Exercise 122.
Reply, dedimno the above invitaeUm,
ifru 11710
■iu fi tad iiiHitJu j^ln^mm sttks
uHj pmu in tw mn (% tinu
ifii vm snvDJie] aw ^i^ nmj neiu m "Hi fl mk^
ifeu 8 71 s: JJ1 ikajj fi iriu rhu & iJwS msi il wiu
itfelsfitm flwi flstinikau murhviwafM ynulxi
lomn il iiWH prmi uiifb }ji {i!i vhu roo
Sflieiof lunu
(240;
B. BUSINESS.
Exercise isa
An anatoer to cm applieaMonfor a derkahip.
^ fiSvi iifiu tVoJi)
fl3 U1EJ iwi ymij
mjlu VTH im sr M i3\i ifeu «] or so inn uu Tw Tfinu
V
fivmw
iwrc fluu u'lEj iwi St wi yn rm Ti vm w ii« iw
lifeu if^ do uTTi lyn mi iwnr nirlu irw Tii Hbej j) fcb
liiiwyh irraj^ ft S1U riiim Bo inu ilU irh uu n1 walijill
pmuvwuLiflYhfiu^ 4isrSuL3ii ifeulvi ra liJ mtj
vim
u'u vm flSn ufluiVnJt}
(241 )
Exercise 124.
Invoice.
WM lifhiiiu UQunnJu MInm
^fi
6\>l)Jb1LU 7.n. GIB5
iw muj in ti^ UTtj (Ti) Timj
vm mum w TtHi^ w Tim w m vrnwimm
111 mmtnm Ife vann siu ei lu nm so imi w
rfn GiDS Lin m iuti irss iiJu iTu inbo inn mu 3iyii«n
In Th Co wTvtfiJ inu ih ubu jji nu Ij tfe vivuntj ■aiiij S
II
flftnwaflijlsjnn
S^fiPigf YiQUfl
tj -^w nu WM Inhiifti
(242)
Exercise 126.
Requ£8tfor payment <^an werdtia aecount.
msljOuiiu UQU rVnJd MiirMm
^i
if \M\nuu 7.n. Gtos.
mmumiiiVKm m) Yirtu
iiJu nm ih sidbtf' irm tnu tosiIw Vh lin ui inu i5U
flYnunwrnlw tninu «c m Ivi iw iin mwisi aiwisi
pfw iihj prmj flulvilw Hi mm mm yh «« thj
w sw mj MT4 Irflulu
(243)
Exercise 128.
BeeeipL
^ (J {q vsm (fi) Ipdvi ilij m io fti hch
1^ ifirs iim m lull !}ij fl 616) lIIIqu luuitiu i.n. 6iB&
u
Exercise 127.
To a dipping firm.
CIUU ^ VJQ) fl do
u^ WW JJ1 tH w «i^ mj MTQ 5liLiiw iifju irnJu
u
TOO iiwfi inwisi amn sr TfiJTU 71 nm aw ifelwl ^
JTfflj sMvuntjlvi msi nmi rmlu fJu ft ^^ lUHitw j. w.
4)11115 imxi]fni]^flnm]1fl'1nniui!(irit]u^vinfl6iiin
TwliJwi wbuIm Tim\ Yinu ifntj msissjjpmjjOu^ :nn
lorrw 5 iWH muj !jiI!iq in oj rhu rati
(244 ;
Exercise 128.
From a firm to a Prince.
vmirMnon^
ji ^ nu vrw irwmm ran nnu yp in ti^ wrisi uw
jjanpiwrimcnsaioinn rn t!h wnnn s: ww ws iJnsm
roairaiw ^"KwTiJuflnmvmw en liftau^inw ranifiyin
T t
TO 2 fw imQ iiw srliljw incrn
Sflinsf (U)
1/ »j
(246)
C. OFFICIAL.
Exercise 129.
ieal mm 71 m? PTN ikim
letiie'o
TU ft en m]urmj il^lnDunf nn etas.
n
ttWH nKvaM uvrvilYiu
1^))iionlild4invicmivipnfiinniiromi Ifiuiprnu
II
Timj di rannn lira
m'WiiimTJjnnijyiflwriHiufHtnis«n i«uiij^
nrrifM jJvnnlyKj imij tJi wnrm
iiwj iiw -vlibi irrn
iJ^vmnmH
11
(246)
Exercise 130.
nrrownmivDJ
nmli
!}|j ^ (no ujH'uu Ti^nilnHuYif nn sias.
ifirc mi fluifh miKi ufH miso*] leiuiij^ VKm9
ntnlvDJ j5 ft w Ti m ife di uu i?lu in ^ filviynu
Mnn(vi)
li
(247)
Exercise 131.
li^ i^ nrau Rvimm
■Hj fl to lUUXJU J^lnHuviffiin siaS.
M ikynu nnu iibuynu i«ri raitisii^ rmj ^ulSnu
t
^ urn nouli^ i^ fi'K }) ra flcm iksimm irni
n D
rmju iiJu ;s nu 1^ Mi ivi9 ra (H) lu D pmu fliimi i
wns iww m Qon sin viui ^ rranu
iwrc WW imi tjjj Lvw 71 iw ss il w ifcj stwijIj^
i^ fi Sn nu vd^ kiwimn m
proHiwiifniiwss'liJjw
lf«J (EJ)
BTSTwlvigj
(248)
Exercise 132.
rminfHnnQu
^i& Wform Mrlkmm stos.
nnu jjn wtw uw tniKn lewnj^ VKimi urmrw
Yinijcli ifKiim
i ffi ifcu 8 71 ^ wn vitl^ fi^ ft ptnjn i«n 5^ yilJi Vh
¥ I *)t/ 1/ 1/ ^ 1^ Oil/ t; i;
uiHD imi Ivi 3imrmimsi su uu in nmj inmn iim
siwnvifisi^lpilvi m vatm ui m mn lAoln mu no
f
rariQU luc nfH mm uuii ivkfl vn ^ fu
1
(w 2 fw luw iiw sslibn irwfn
Qfiind' (fl)
^Mirm
(249)
Exercise 133.
rarroM mHwrftrm
vJ^mmvniA fininof (R) iJ^ rau mu iToj rm;
vamvim
mi vmi ifnmj^ tnmrH inwrirm il ii^ ti Da
- -^ ¥
iwDT (0) isi nnj •] inu uu m oudjtw am mmn fiirrw
lire WW uiftmr^ntfiTMiiJni Ivjirmfii
^lyiw w raw iiTiu Sflirai (B) ^ rm s: fi^ in ft na
nu lire rru Tiii lu lii ^ uu Ivi Thu « iin ft Sin mu
wKu
norm d)
( 260 )
Exercise 134.
prmrji mr mq iteiw
ifncj Mil (H) im (^ipipiIp^ m m ra^ irmn hi
rOITMVltl^
LWTS BUli mIvI Ifhulfl ifel^ (H) Ivi BBTl'tl ^TH
iblTlfl ffiJDJ
Touvtcm m
IflUHi^
(251)
Exercise 136.
mn mim vsm
n
7(1 ft 2 luuntju jMn^nfpin guds.
n T
rati rnn ^ jjwnn uu iiJu rnn ft Iw «rM in uiu iilw
i!lw8sgntjfiij#ii^^ ^ivini iwiTiJ in uu bj n rciTnr
iTM ntj viti^Tpi'lvi nm PTi ^ iw iiJu i3li eitoso inn msi
t
M fmopi ibi iimi L^ srlw p! ^ mi
5mlwi3iwijjnnijyifl wjri^ wi tniMT lauiu^
u u
mnfiTM tlisjnj nnij t!h wnnvi uw iiw srliJjw
VKW (S)
(262 )
HARDER PASSAGES FROM SIAMESE AUTHORS
FOR TRANSLATION INTO ENGUSH,
(With Notes.)
N. B. Word* endqatd in rin^ qmtationt ' '
tpith rtfmrmvot numi«rf dre tmiMtefacI or exflavMd
in the eorresponding footnotes.
Exercise 136.
lu dka flourau d tniu vktej tqu tmu ^ fl iilu nuu
lnqi ilnnu mi^ luJn 71 ft iiJu nuu i(in n^ m n im it
71 im emu % mi li mu IHim Vh ivifiou luju Sj iin^
pcum Mil nmihi Bi nuu % {kn th ^ui %i' i m
n
nn & riTH ibnnoi vh fton ^mtittumlvigiviulnQn ^
1^ mu flCM li) ciuu i) len ivinn w iksjioi vn mn 'ilin
D
vmfk ^ ibnnoi (hi ti lun 'lln ilitMffu iiJu flu iJtn'^
lu !)n iilu H iju iJtriEJ iffi Ifi Im m ptu 111 lu lom
fKTM ^ 111 ft mu SjntjH l^ 71 'llflfl' 5 iiJu KM ijjs
mv\[umlai\i^ im 11^ ivdJgu nrifkn snum iiJu
(253 )
t
iJ!)o%liiAii?i!lnprNi^tim'lii{UJi9iuln liJn^
S^ijmfhiiJumijmjimll^imvfiluimviri mv\i
iiw viZ<3m ih luju 1 UTU viunwuyhiiJueifH^ nrsn
iim im iihi mira (Ji uu^ ti) lu tin r\s::9m tm ib
ivinn fliyinil^lfllvi mmt iImh pimvi ^lij su m
ti
tm\mm&i fkiwtmvr\r]ii'^tifmwmii\f\u
lUH m siq nu fh ii^u n NEH i^ iTu um ri u iTu tick
0^' PIU fl d ilU i^ d Su fliu fill iH ^ ii iiJu PIU su im
^ nio^ iilu nn 4m Yh mi 1ICH uiej fiu afH uitj g^lu iT^u
(254 )
fnjtin urn i^n vm uq£j irn uu % itn ^ In n ^m mi
^ 3u (fn effiH 7H nuu lu % lileH iiJu 1^ fhi aiu i(^
TifH u^ i^ iPii^ urn intb) ivi^ ipf^ iich it^fH
Note*
1. i* nited. i. on duty. S. diatent from each other at iDtenrals
of. 4. 'on each side alternately' Mi. set nn«Tonly like the teeth of a
fish. 5. (^ngliah) gas.
Exercise 137.
lu liteH mmsn S) im tin bli ntn^ ii)cH luj iin vitl^
a
iiB mm Ivm in iw mm j\i 'finmimi^ ivifUfl ' i
u
mi&\ iiJu lib S14 'nn lira' ^ miumiw ^rm
^"^^llJJJ^' 3 PKKJ A «M fflJ ' Ju REM lin IflU ' 4 lu
Ai ill 'mu «iiu' 5 clhtj uu un n j5 Ki i^ wrj ilh *]
i^im H vift^ U14 effi)4 n um PKSj^'TMnu'liJinmu
(255)
nuu Tti ivim JSi Tfh WM •] fiu U'thrarwi' 6 imliiil
(him irNmfnluuolfimHnu irHmiKil^Jinu))
luxi^Ti^iiKqft^ nlfiuiuiiuciQuciuiiJuTn
T t
fltrnfiiTimnn tJwTiinfiijlsliJwKJ mi um jjhj
U II
r u
TTM Jtilidl uu Vh WRj ivwn iihi YTM pw fn fc man n i^
iihiflliHPit^liJsutrHliiu vl iiJu illu pri *^ ni^
iQu m iiJu irm nu imjg i^ fn ^ luj iSi ti^ pkkm n ns
smui Ihjm 31U rni]Jufiroj n tu !!u tvi ^itm imjo urn
t
ifhiihiR!Myrwim ^Ymirai^flij iTMniliJyrM
vlii TTM K) JJ1 yrw vlit^ ^ii'\}n m m mi t^ 'vIm f^
fliTbHTunlilmj l3s:iiJii«i'ty|y}n«ivnll'tti iiJu
( 256 )
iffu iilu itmun mvmmit 'Tm\m\i^m']fk
liJ > 8 un ^ iiJu ^ nQn nu^ fl vril^ mi m Sii vitt^ m
iiJu (nu VEH ■] vilt^ w % si nu rni froj 110^ flu «fH piu
mu ^ vin iin: iui: viufiu in mi wnt im in^ fi fh
n
mi flhntrvi irn vm^ ilon fierH ^ mu tJilfl nj^sn ilff\ fn
mivinjiinui ira lu D un iim {nuni u^ iim inri
MM n Yh iiiu fluj vi!H iv^u fiii iwmivfii m^mm
ft m4 III K TQj i)^ m i villi uimttm iiJu m im
ti
J)iur»uiBu iw Til « wan w ^Tjj SnTowSl RTWjljilii
I. North west. 2. arranjifed, fitted up with. 3. magnificentlj
decorated. 4. to go up and down for pleasure. 5. in comfort.
6. glass windows. 7. important towns. 8. iron couplings. 9. sit-
ting closely together.
(257)
Exercise 138.
lu 201: mill i^iuoyuj s:l)piujjidufl^'{[]eiQ
Tii ^ Iw ft ay' ftj TTW fi rt piuftflyuunisrgi'iiulw
fl II
TTwftTOlmlTiiJlientJTJvinffiin tih vrw flu ibanni rtu
iDEHftfldluiJnYifiiimruwiiiS^ Ivl ffi gmi uu
II
T
WWW fnui^ftiwMijTUpfHiJfe^Tmlnflfiu ivlfeu
•fimnyniulil 'i&MURJna^' 3 iiljusrufinraiu
r
TiQmwm 111 m piu VI fl^ lUQUuu nun m im
luu sr lion FiQu ui'^'Wj in ivSlum ir\ ww\fm m
lu fllrw Lun in •« uan ifnli'^ ww utm pmu iiifi ti
11
yh rn pm fld fw luii ^ raij jji ikmjlpi nwwiJBniiri
u
iti fhun 319 luii ivi^ flu smluii pibu ui ii!n u fhun
ti a
(258)
314 9 4i uon im in 111 11% wa i vsm tm^il vnid m
n
piu fl iihi suiTH im \mk f^ilu ikirm uu itm m
ih lira flbj n ifli ^^ lit fl rki iviDqu aim iSq iinrat
(kjiJffiiuinuuuiilnliJifb]!kiflU0iiu0iiJiEj iru^
niinliJfkun 'PTTJjfifHiii' 6 irw wnitiilu^^
ivmiuu tn tH wn Iw JJ1 luw nifnwnuirM iisn
ftmn^lwiJii^ n ifn 111 2"^ il ewTi
Notett.
1. (EDgliah) telegiaph 'wires. 2. Dfws uf any kiihl. 8. Korat
(a town about 194 km. by rail N. £. of Bangkok). * 4. code. A. to
fCQ out shootinK 6. across the fields. 7. friends and relations.
Exercise 189.
chj \m nwmtj imi wtrM ^ wem wn wr-m iviu liJu
i Klvimulwlvigj «n ^liJ m\ if4w mi lira pth •]
rs — r^
(259 )
rarnu vm mi iJnn ^ (^ i^ liJ vn wq f^
lufl U'S4 raiu 4] nKvhj no flj 4i4 uu Tin ^ Tin ikrrv
t I
(hj ranmcj inn i£ fiu o^ ^ iksj iinliJ iviu vk
n^ nu lira mu lui 909 ^ 3fM nu ym ^ lu vh litrM
t
MEN 1) nfiu piij Ito ill nlvifl ?u g^ ifMi iiu nEH il mu
^trawwi Allium nim ^Tvmj 7M fc MM dii
I ti
i^ n pS B^ iiJu in^ m Ivl fimi vh ^ atM if^fM
iJ!ljini£))^!l^im imlvl n^nru od imifi rm
T li T
iwi piu «ivrfilj sr la' lii m? nij n iJk^ 1h liJ jji fd
vmbfu
\iin\imtvKS'mmt!ufsli)\Kff\ mmmm
ti ti
iHivunmjimwiwriiJu^vwTi iin'ls liiiwyfe
r u
Fin rai t^ mrm nu m ilw nrmi sr ni -^ Vh
iw (WW 71 lin S rmS^ ' il fii w ' 2'[vr fh ' nu
t
inQu ' ^ Wiun iinlwtj m imi uon w mi luw n m
( 260 )
(hj nnmEj i^ uu 7^ 71 VOu lun NQf^^^Ti
in uihn' 5 nrsTitj mi ni f^ 71 nu iwOa 8 iiJu nfw
u r
«j iTjj s'liJul? inwi'^ -srMJiiifhifenfwwd
JIq ifa prfi Wtb m iSi 4^ WfmqjTi 71 fiuj ii« isi s:
WW mj fclw «c iJN ilrwi fi s^ wn in «i^ iw itn wnils
i^ifiw
rami mn liu n mliJ iJn ilrfoj pnu Is ^ wu
i^sl«jio^«iijs 'IpHwu in ' 6 nX iifn 4^ lai
11QU ilu }n i^ {^ V iin MB nn %j 1^ iviu iiJu ^ )) m
ll^7ii^8^«S4Si^fi^fiyioi4
I
Notes,
1. (English) steward, major-domo. 2. ordered. 8, a kind of
soup, bisque ? 4. reliable information. 5. myself. 6. qnickly.
(261 )
^fC^fii Exercise 140.
v^ im ivm i^ ^^ vidii oy r% irfi 8 4^ Sj itn
»«?«' Tii'TM'lii'ufnjiniftuau^eiBTi m m^^V^k]
I ifili'tJ p8 rail dJifi ' 1 lun du liJ '31 vi^ iiri nu S ' J) qviS
iiji/ft" (4vntpiFi'2f||5nQijjyHOTMViflTti bis erwuti ^ sr Vh
jV'^ iiricjTwWiiJuliJfRrMlw nWnHSuufliJiii&MiSfi
n
(^ { ividEiu rmmu YmJfM i^ rflj ^ rii n^ stM vi^ iiri uu ti
I*' . t n u
nOTJ TlJ -^J IVI&IU ^ du j) PWUJ l^ls flETH ^ SW SS
r
ifiii woan'hnjrljn wflWiiluiiPimLBi'lsniHi fttjiyh
^ f* tl U II
UU
Iff!
j^ t!lu wg^ iiri iviu iwn uu nmi wnti iiJu fropmlil iing
^ ii iMi W Wiilu wuYmu pi iin jw lYn !ifM vi^ iiJu
^ivnw flO im mm iin vi|^ im uu n itn Is Is lin ad
iiju rei Rintj %uls rrarttj im uu n if^ iffei vkm
( 262 )
Ivn inei rv^ irm n^ iiri mi iiJu fsra 6) ftj inu C^eiu
unOmuimi
vaakti Jh nr^Yh vro Mim icNiri n« ui H nth
iriui in CM uri nq f^ Ivioj hch vi^ im uu irn Yin
i4jljtnj»h£j Jin uulil ^ ^ W un jn ifttn re ww i
un iwi: pmu fKrv) pmui^fhPiitiinSntiylfh
M^ iin Lviu d pmu HQU n ihm ihivnM iu ^ iiJu
Jtliij^ ^ iTH lu \ms ran*^ in 111 nj^ un uflnn i
- ^» • .•not' '
sr jJ iJi fro w B^lu inw n iiw iffeH «^
vKJ7iiifn&
I. did not know that he was fast asleep. 2. power. S. to wake
up iu a fright. 4. still suited him lit. did not deceire different
from what he liked. 5. canary. 6. stigmas (of flowers),
'■■' ■ BflPa Jtt
(263)
Exercise 141.
tl u
f(] NEJ1U imr lu uvi npvuxj wi c3itjl«nflj ^ i^m i?i^
urn 44l^iJ)r!uwbi%fkinu'i'i^sirvi'3|li^%
T
njrnraliJS
ee\\> lom i^ miQu nsHu inn il^ i!n ivh fiu tfiira
^ w KM tfii fin 31 niilra wi il si i^ miaj rwHH
im ]km ifn ^ ^ uuffiim viu loi kn ivh m iimi
cm' 5 uTEj Q^ Jbn ih 'RTjrmjimil'6 iJj::fiij wnffiina
Tut ^ liitilklB^ ravn {Vilo' im^iflcj imi ilu b i^
T tl
r
(264 )
«
II
i iiJu ' U1EJ i5u ' 8 s: wu ^ £i wi n ^ iinirwiitjnn
fiiiifipi ' fnolu into ' 9 BTtj n ^ a ilu n vn tJEMlvi
prwTisnjDn f^mlvi an i^ fiij filii ^ ffa itn •in
^ifKj ii iihi uitj l31i Si rauj an iiJu fnop Su1jj"K
iwi ifi ^ wflu fiu ' fM lSb iviu 5 an 71 ' 10 voiajj
mem inn siinu fllw nnfh dm tw iflJiw mtm fnqp i^
TO iSlra wsm vn Iv! un lilfM awa^l'wi i^lwiWatJ
^miEwrrawaiflnsii«£jviwiwulil wujfriJkmmS
?
1. Judgement. ii. Chief Justice. 3 settled. 4. deposed.
5. In the year of the horse of the fourth decade, /or cycle).
6. agreement of servitude. 7. truth. 8. creditor, master. 9. the
period during which, slavery was legal. 10. approve.
(265)
Exercise 142.
isi«Mrhi% wivinmvnqj iwrin iihi miuS
Qtra i^ fliilij fw ifttj ft ^ r^ ira^ § Iw lion sm '§
i^ iiJuLsi' 1 im iiiu ' u iMi %n ivrife p^ w ' 2
^ iiJu cj sr iJn nifM fvi vmu iiur ui isi Ivi ihnfiqPi
Tnjfttmfl^ i Ijj lUFi imnr s: Ivi ^ijs itelmm pmu
li
ibaw^i KM Ru "^ L^ vifti vitntj piu uw sslvi iiJu nm
iiJu iJrltjwi iin pfi w wlu iiPTsiiii \m miinfmm
' lllu lf^£JJ^ LlJu PIfll Pfe inu l&H ' 3 BU iiJu ^ ifbl
T
aw w wvitno iin iiJu rm ^ «c Ivi i?w ikltjml ra
afl MM in Mb ^u liJ mt) lii mjj iwx umi pmu m
LSI fw sr re: L§u i^ iniJwiuimimuiiflWQlsiih
ft tw Yinij 71 y Mu m? i^Tw twliw im |i iJjtwtfi m?
m flu tJ lu WB m *] M iwflu n nu itm wm uii m ra
WW itewjfi ffiw afi m iipi'li lii in sin ikiYipi Su iiJu
pmuikwj^tijRpmuSiMntJ BUinsrwuSntiaui^
r 266 )
<^iibin in£i^i^^iilu«u7vitKn%iJi:
t
nu imflflivl^irvisirnTfl'lliivni iwrmfllSiTh'lu
(w urotJ 'mwro Is' 6 7ii<niiwitrw insm inu ui
Trmsuihu Sliilsi in iijmiin s: iiJu ^i^ nidbjmj r^
tiiiSiYiiwfWwiTiiiiJuwijflniiriwniriwivinitJ Ivi
^ ^ im MEJ ^huis leojf] fiij ibriTin wiiJ« ^ in s:
w iviu in sr Wm vsAxm viun itoi im s: In a pitdj m
jjinSuliiprijiflaft srffe Is 'JitftvfM'lrinOh ftsr
ivjdoufnji^ iwxmiuFiAQintNliJ tnWjisii^
iJ« iiJu ilnA^ 1^ Vhlm lib iti(^ im pmu iA[j} s^ lun
m m 9m ^ ^ srliilli iviu lo^ lun m iiiu rm i^ fl
u
1. rulC'S. Kings. 2. ruler, jiovernour. 3. for the honour and
ftdvAntage of the country. 4. gambling. 5. duty, pontion.
6. purposely. 7. posterity.
( 267 )
Exercise. 148.
' ifb lei Jfu ' 1 ft fo]u ui i% fiwi gy n uhi fKra
Tifw Twu Thm mu mi ^ iJn pow iin w wflfrwTU fl iihi
^ffiqH im Tivnj linn sm Suife in ro ifew fftm nu ay
Tjj pti rrii iDooo Piu iiJu toiH fiij ii2n ^ fiij Ti ft
iifittju fi Ife tin wm fflj ^hIiJ Hirmn lu Sui^ su
^ tl nft^ sr "Ui n^u iJDtH ^i^u iiiu inj fi en Ivi in o^
ifiJiu i^ ti vAi m ^Ivilii i^ ^i^ntju ' iiJ^ vm
fiiiliJ m&i' ^ uin vivra ^ iiJu ii^ %ii\hi u tl iiJ^
fw vitia In Yivn? ^ iiJu PIU tajii ikilNlvi ati ft w
uu i0u m iivKQj uoijpi ^ m nu iiJulj^ mi? iiiin ou
i^ 131 tJBJj Ivl iJTO nmn vnfs^mi fwlii In nvra uu
71 ft s5^ j1 toIiJ'Iu irrc viflntj iivw ft b^i um U In Im^
rln^iJuwnihnflTQifhSu 'itwn7i'5^8ni5
In Yivnj nan aui^ ft lu iJJeM laiwj y#B ^ i!bi in
( 268 )
«Mnf|H iTM sm rmj ywtjiiq Suiwj im jn ff^ffm nu
Notex.
1. Aden. 8. officer. 8. civil servanta. 4. reUeve each other.
6. of inferior oonBtmction. 6. crater.
Exercise 144.
fwii ikst itiB in mm yiniJB^'JitJEBilviiJr
Tumi ' iiJu iTi^i f^ su flwvmulw' i Ira lAi iin iim 5
T t T
ifkijliilfl du iIt^ fw viuu lu rm S ii ^ &1 m fm t
t t
ffluj iifej iw yiu itim yiu ^ ati "iu fli f4i ^u tij w 'lu m
u t
IM' 2 ifei:i^vDJi£jfisrTwlui(rM^QwfivKM v^
t
ifkjj wrsm ^ ^ iivm n ilu ifbu Su liJ vn wi liStJ m
ti
«
Bimi^rafitmSiiJufnnTy^l^raTjJi^Slw enu
flhm^'lSprjTjJiffejjTwEJBflu JSii fe liu fiii iffaj ^
in ith i5bj i^ rhtjlti ui i^ m im ifb? rii 'm?
(269 )
f T II
^riHijliluMiui%mu(%iuT7iifl'WntTWiiIlfl?(il ii
sr 111 iirm iru %ilil uu vrvi vi^ imulvilmj viu iiJu m
^ wtM luiu 111 tm TTH ^ Rjjpfjj % s: iJnFwn mmi
sriihiUfl^iiQij imrmtN'iiiiluflgupnT'liJ m
n II
ThnMiirctimfTM vwuvit^l^fiiwaTMsuliJfi^fi
u
( 270 )
^4 vi% un Jml^ nij Tau iiJu Is rauj 71 u % i9iu il^lii
% liJ s: iihi fl ^ % ikflu un ^ s!) imr vdb m lllfniu
l!BTVlPWtJ!inife1lJt«
Kotrx
I. a meaoB of self help. 2. at the canl tables lit. in the circle
of the cards. 3. manual labonr. 4. .'i points or headiiifts. i5. to pilot,
(i. to steer.
Exercise 146.
vmmfmw^^ 8 ii«; iiJu nu «t^ iinriiJumj
nu gi ' i^ iiw ' 1 S n iiJu ^ fltTM ^ vn pmu SM ^
WW mj s: Yinu 71 iTu & u!i?nfl im ptbj awn ^ 1^ oti
r II
vilblii iwi: ivvi ft D |i rh i1\i litKQj ijinil^m
( 271 )
PiUThi^um mn i s: In mu ^ Th i^ urn vspm
Mil cmItw piu yh i1^ iiw ifeu ^ ^ * sr fin ^
mm ' 2 piu vh i^ iii^ n ^ i?1n il ^ wm ^ ^
n
U T tl
(hj nth nib 111 imirivvi^nJwifuiivN^aeH uulii
T U
iiwH i!h iiflh ft iiJu (WTJJ -^ Ivi nu iwu "te rotj m au
T
mn ft fhnnn pi^ wwlvi IsntJ siirej mnc\ iki rmn
imriwiTw n iwrt; ivw fl ss ilw lifM Ivi iiPiu ^jIeh
T t
iunnmiH{i)vnviQlu ln ^ ^u snu vn wmu ilimoii
ifc intJ Ivl iifl ifm PHUJ ivk lint ^^ lu vw ym ft <«
fkmui Pi^ iSj n tj ^ lenr vn WW sfi uw fijuirn iviu
I ti
iTi JEW roj fl^lu m i^ tJi m i«ja ^ nu •] n nurauj
aw viiin Su Iw WRj iVi^ lu^ s^ vi3u lan iwi ou Si in
( 272 )
Italia "5$ WW i!Fi ifn Ifl i9lu i!fe Til t^ Ivil) •] S iiJu ^
Nine*.
1. counterfeit coin. 2. will be put in iafl. 3. weights
4. lit. to hear the voice of phuntiS and defendant i.e. to hear both
sides of the question.
Exercise 146.
Cm B ss ntrn fc WW iJntim an fltm vitfj "ji unwi
FluwvinuiQifiwuilulfmB dfw iJnfiui ^ Tw iiJu
Ivigj PTMPiutJ9jJilritiuipiTiJj'«a2liiv^ narbmi
sriiJu nrw ra Iwi dfuj iw ifiu 'h sr ww m? arlj n
t
Iw Rjj iJnfiui mj UMTC iiJu pmu ra fiij il tck n wem
t
Ivi Si WBU w fiij lailTitJ ffu ibi ^ ftij lai tfe m m?u
t
m? lau uii iviSqu flu iwoiSi^TihliiilntmilfiPi
f
«oji]|fi ymJ« mwm su yi^ §u i^ tieh fl % 1^ 9am ^
rw^^^pa^ ■■..!
( 273 )
^ Imlii i) fl cvi ri pmu ilncmn i^ 9 tJQU iJntiun
T
fm dltelffi dlrovnlwifiJmjrojiliuij*] in iiJuaw
nu ?i 6q itn iiJu isi nfM iJn rafu lut vm uvm lu otrm
«
ihj tjlii j) utt il 111 wfl wuj iJniiui fi Tjj vtw ' miu
T
iJntnjT BflTM wai^ pirmtj' 1 vnTiiTjiTmSHiTTiJ
t
ymlmi ira mi n vn rotj mfw fwijj tkji mnmiJ Tpil
«sSw irw Piu fi viSij itn sntj ifli iitw 5a ifn nw wn tlu
T
"Wj 4 vnri iTM Fiu n 1^ farm 'lii nfiij snu ' 2 mi
t
ivivKKirKmifnafMm'luvramj ym vn n^Ki eojH^
r
wimm&iumtfjq'i'ik qlud ibrrv' 3
1. to attempt in many wnys. 2. nnjust. 3. too many.
(274)
Exercise 147.
vmrxK ThiVHVitritjIlijtlEiu'^vrikndflulviqjuEKJ'iu^
m mrt ' 2 ijirsi ay iiJu ^ tji ipn uvw «an pin «^ w
iJm luiflfMuuSlnuuslTvinipmi^TiJjjila^innilifi'
Im evrm im iiJu i tim m^ mh iiri ni^ vi^mu
iiiufilijrin im il!)o) mi m ms viQ ^ nu iknon rti4 ^
TttJ DTM "^ iifl )5\pi WKJ m? m mti j1 mv\ Iviqj uoj
n vniu jsj^ ni7 On agu mu S7niiikj ifljjf] dnthim'^
i^tii S) fluiu vigi i^ evi {<Knn f^r^vim^^\vim
V A h el h> I t^
mg rai rili ^ 3 iirfi i) n LMWi tfejj B^ Kill wrarrra
ikm VranliTlij ^ Si ^ ptm •] «Twij nraftiti ' ifws
gon ' 4 ino^ mriifff iin vi74 nk i^iuu iiJu fl inm^ mr
Itrj liiQ i']fli iim 7U enjuj 9 iiJu ui wrmu uon fvuui
(275 )
vmi vk(3 Tioii wlvi^ |h fl9 nl j& iiJu ft ivi^ rm
rfij im ifh rfO muivi2tujVK^uuiiluvifleH%j1iJividBu
iJ»^ puj lira rat fl u^ mi (^ iin ikh 5) nm iiJu elu
b
*ri rnrsn m nj:wi ^ •] wte stm •] Plw riii frhtflli ii« ro
9nu ru; 904 yinim iieh rar rmu liJfH uu itvnu n
i«j1«j 70/1 lira Iviqj'^wj nil VK ft w wuthju^fl
u) ri iiJu mu lifen {VI ivi^ iiio Mii iik^mfii nun
iSkH'5 iiflWHi«^ *fiBn'iirrarra''6 5ralu^iiljn
i^ildl^yHu^niiroliJraEjifligflu^eKrvi ilnuYi
Tiu i!n 'Is Is' 7 iwi trk fl^ isua iflw 8 ilmoiitiBUDt
imi fm snuiduj iiiu i \m intfi flrui ikm narp
tmmi rralStj wsEMfl 8 j1 wr fiuyi wr wn vd^
( 276)
' iMU m fuil^ ' 9 fl^ ^ 1-^ un !)fiiB pdQ ^ fh
cnu reru^^ iiJu vmnji ^ lencj rni m^ idb^EJOic;
tl^ t w^Itrj lenriism vn m n)^ mf^mr^wi
msfom im % NQ Pi^ UTJ nli) in \ftka imcj nu miJ«
T -
vn m y(Am uvilij siiiJu i^ unci iiiu W&u m
Sutm.
I. ouce upon a time 2. soldiers. 9. evenly. 4. to yu (of the
King). A. reception hall for distingnshed (traugera or gaeats. 6. to
tmnaact the banneaa of the Kingdom 7. were diligent. 8. ruler.
9. to reign. 10. food for the King.
Exercise 148.
i«n liu d Ijh ono uirl wnnn wjiws w:isi oy vi^
vShrc9 i i^ uJfrnr uu im ^ rm rai iim i^ fijievNyot
( 277 )
m ^ifhi . 1) (!h (Tvi mu Tm le^ vormi mCtiu re» i\i
!lulfidmin'l!jlu1iji]iai^m4'^ ft tiuu lii <i^ d nmnu
ifanmu dbo nJ gouiueff iy^ijo^iijI i^i iJkH im nrnrrv
i^iilu 'ill in' 3 isi ywjTiTTU fhw 5liTJ wrfiijw^ rao
T
lurm'5 lira yi»N^ msrimiu tmti vnl^ iifl ^ i]fM
m *] vonjuri rui^ vorisi fiy i^ tin spi |il ifttm uijfl
T
*un'6jnwns uiej ihm ijsnm nrnj {i«j Tin wrmiui
' Will « iwu Is ffw iwi un 71 ' 7 liiji'lnjiPiEj'tesij
( 278 ;
m TKKidmim vanrm eoiJh winsi g^ vn tii4 nKm
rtn^Jvi iviu Ti ttb ft iw il« htm betm mi ' iilu nu nuvin'8
n u
wnmi iwniiinri ^ tin wrnmilibi ir^T Ivi hi vm
T t
nAij (^ ui ^ iilv] iwh vmrm miuu nt^ in ft ilmi
1. where Bttddha^s tooth iu kept. 2. all in i-eadiiieas. 8. chief
roan, saperintendant. 4. prayed for the well-being of the Kin)?.
6. Buddhist doctrines. 6. deeignatorj particle of palm leaf books.
7. said unwillingly that. 8. proud.
Exercise 149.
- 9 mnm. mlfHrm imHn&'mffltem'i %
U T
riN iTiriT ijvn ijflj 8 3 Ivi Yinij ra ftu Ti ihi'^n^wt
DJWiliJwimn IviiJviiraiJjiTnRvnijlllvi^lviQjfn
mu iwn tnu m? wCfu WW «] iinSlviifjnimimy i«u
(279 )
(TNI ^Liiuftf^nnTMnuuvnjYmliJsniiEHPm&JiK
d nnu iisq jih isu q^Iu vmi iJrmA k jfj q19)pvj il^
Ihj UDJ ifn f4i,miij vitb i^ iJirmn lAu (w <}iJ tr^ \hm
• ilhSti^Slpwiim^iBTiJvnfHj'liirnjiiBWMi^in
lu mru ikmR wi to ^u uu lAosrfnjS'lvicj'ln^
nulfi QLTN Q1U ui Q^ i^ iihi nu i^ m 'Ivi snu
lu^ 4 WQ (w ifh 0^ mu nuu «h uutM ijnS nm ng mj
ti t
dinQB9fi2\rannvi 49m4vi»i^'h mimmaiuu
fin iflu mj wilu iiJu nu ira (w Ivi iiikm sm wiirra
iiiy^i vam ikmn 9 ilIu mr ttiSn S Ivi inn n^Q vir
( 280 )
iKi iihi rHJh un ^ ^ iin iihi iHi ihN tmu mivmi
ibmn ifiu im ikrra u!nTii9NirrmuiliJinirlfii M
T t
mi Wliiinn*]
Note*.
1. Edict of the 1st ft 3nd Kings, i. officials. S. great city. 4. the
three card.triok. 5. said (to the King). 6. unfair.
Exercise 160.
jS iwami TinlfHmiliJjn irwrn Ivi iJjsmpi un wr
In yinu yn rm 01
lu ^wsiJTifi rojiw wnsi fl^vft ' 1 Ttt^ wmu rtiJI?
ifu iriu i0M {«raj in 3 fl«)u'In'lviqjt}i| vil^nd'Wi
Ml ft J WB diuljii^lpi iiwTjJtmtnuuiinSl'Wjinn
u a
iyhttIt^ ihiifm^mi 'iiuij vkw' 2 tl^ Sli uckj lii
■M I ^r^
(281 )
m ftli ^ A % itri i^ !)wcjn[iiJ»n)fis£lvi vonjnj
im ijbi ^un vJi^lYRjlvi ilm Kitm mu luju flcm
% n
4i9 fv (iQu ifiN mritri ijbu % rnsnn vdNEJ uJu Su ijm
Ivi Si *Tvflij yurQUTjj vwm ym i wroinu ife srlvi uro
T I t
HTiiMH fHibwirefnlyiwSuiiln ft iwamviilri enu
nvmij uvH vitl^ tHsrwlTnj^^ivSij^inmutin
uvH vrtfa wrrra ^ mm wnnw m\m wnsi oti i%
ialibwintrn Ivi sw nulN ii^ wilw ii n iwnr vin
sslw ftp vm^felyitj n ifb^ m vmi iiJu rai im rranij
f T
im iihi pfJTU Lsf^ im rm ilrni ilSfM 6^ lull!
Notes
1. title of H. M. The King of Siam. 2. method ordered by the
King. 3. townsfolk.
( 282 ;
APPENDIX A.
A classified list of over 800 common words,
liable to be confused owing to the differences of
the tones.
Words bracketed together are pronounced
alike, words on the same line have the same
fundamental sound, but different tones accord-
ing to the column in which they are placed.
Be careful to notice the name of the tone at the
top of each colxmm.
§ 1.
Vowel sowids inituiL
Common
Falling.
Low.
Q7U a net
OBU
soft
fat
babyish
Bi uncle
til
to dress up
d1
to gape
0^
a bowl
iTu
to refer to
Q1U saddle
Q^
to read
Q1U shame
^
low fellow
\ steam cough
iifau
bent
ilfet4
slender
i
dock
%
to rustle
re. i'.aSi._lk ^ .-_ . ,
r 283 )
§2.
Common.
U
B initial.
uti on
{
inu to blossom
iJT« to guard
Falling.
' ufi to crush
un path
UTI lesson,
chapter
tlu to grumble
tJi shoulder
uu thin
Itj leaf, sail
iin to slacken,
lighli
fii marsh
idn pestle
tJitj afternoon
"^{j to chew
the cud
uv slave
i6q surfeited
6ii to cut
Low.
tli mad
tllu house
tjlj some
ijly to smear
111 dumb
iSi crucible
& surly
ifio idiot
im slice
(284)
§3.
Qll
Ch. initial.
Common.
male
\
to pierce
to seize
by force
to dam
tea
nun
people
Falling.
Low.
Acute.
(ill
TW.
41j
noise (^
cymbals
workman
elephant
\^
\H
it is so
to use
4>
&
cymbals
lame
goad
' <
(ii
*
cries of
slow
joy
k
■is
noise of
frying
burning
wood
to point
out
joyful
•
wet
iin
lH^
to rent
morning
Rising.
mn
granary
my
muTor
9u
pungent
t
excl:of
contempt
m3
to be nt*-
moured
(285)
Hi
upright
iHtJ
lagreeable pleasing
• •
to rejoice
at
storey
grade
bruised
I
careless
§ 4,
Common
Falling.
Low.
sm
^w
4h^
proud
yielding
to aim
4&U
sad
^11
tiny
insipid
1
s?
wages
to talk
leader
strong
to ar-
manifest
range
^:
.
sign of
future
^
•
to roast
to tickle
Tch, Dj\ Initial
Acute,
yes
Rising.
gloomy
^1
yes
much
(286 )
§5.
Common.
Falling.
D. initial.
Low. Rising*
flQU
fJTU
itiu
to play
hasty
cut off
hard
custom
house
stubborn
f)1U
^
alone
cotton
thread
whoever
i^Ul
can
i^fn^
one only
height of a
platform
etc.
now
fiu
Kti
earth
. to roll about'
m
§ 6. d li ^* *^*'^'-
Common
•
Falling.
Low.
Acute.
Rising.
di
t-x
f}i
(Ji
straw
SC
tl
^alm of
lehand
Je of
le foot)
dark
hi
mille
It
sky
lid wall
•
sapan
wood
( 287)
Common
Falling.
dm
to send
1
Low.
bamboo
floor
Accute.
Rising.
iJitj
din
sour
fJin,
to beat
clothes
diy or ^
d-Kj
hollow of
the hand
concern-
ing
flax
to dam
Id
fire
to dei^ire
d
d
pustule
d
fti
to snore
j1^
tomuttOT
aboil
di
to listen
coast
^14
to bury
du
(1) to cut
(2) tooth
dn
scabbard
pod
dft
to twist
a rope
fin
to hatch
to dream
lAm
to sift
?lm
to beat
against
foam
to float
to accuse
if(w
fluted
carved
to be di-
vulged
f uang 8
alts
(288 )
§7.
w
Rising,
to look for
1
ray oyster
vos to guard
jealously
y^Q tower
wToj brave
^^ to divide
^ to boil
hasty
net
uw vigoi^us
wTj tail
louse
to yawn
a small jar
■
WW (1) to lose
(2) health
^14
im
VI
Falling,
^^ plague or
D.P. of jars
of water
tw to feel an-
xious for
TO bundle
mi goose
ViV
9a
to carry
litter)
hungry
ava
castor oil
puppet
procession
place
separate
to bark
\ a plant
t^Tjj not quite
npe
H. initial.
Low.
* five
titbu to siispend
tfe quickly
kx^ shares
life angry
ah dry
*f shop
] jfelfe to weep
life togive
^ to prevent
ftg to carry (as
a bag)
(289 )
§8. .
Common.
fi29 artifice
^ to run
together
nf)f]i drum
IfiR far
riTii stag
m3 glue
im to
scratch
9 I
AA^ Srdpers.
pronoun
n
Fallmg.
^ laws
^^ to press
riu to reap
Of at dawn
nkm match
box
%K. \G. initial.
Low. Rising.
ffti but-
tocks
nou before
im old
Q cooing
im bold
an
(1) old
(2) si^
of dative
my body
^y^ to em-
brace
n^^tube
Inrf' near
niit wide
dtu mass
rtb to step
i?1i nine
^ to lend at
usury
im small
deer
ufl' to mend
ifw cover-
ed
( 290 )
In spring
tm to cheat
fiu with, to
protect
fitu-^D. P. of
sermons
noi troop
pile
In hen
tn: bent
Hxi haft
fifii basket
fill to separ-
ate
ffti echo
if*iw3 to asso- i<*i?jQ toen-
ciate tice
§9.
Common
person
R}J
sharp
aPiR 51
/f//. initial.
Falling.
RQ
neck
to op-
press
Low.
viscid
i*5u
to hurl
chapter,
heading
Acute.
to look
after
Rising.
feather,
fur
bitter
cross
wise
no
please
to beg
(291)
R1
HI
rfi I
^
in
cangue
a root
—
rfi price
4-) to
kill
trade
leg
Riy
•D"m
RTtl
my
rough
1r w
stake net
citmp
iK
to sell
who
^gg
fever
to pull
out
to unlock
RT3
musty
smell
•
113
news
111
knee
to ride
i%i (i) rice
(ii) to en-
ter
ordure
dregs
order
series
1113
white
mi (i) 3rd
pers,
pronoun
(ii) hill
(iii) horn
■
to flog
to write
salted
•
dark
colour
needle
scythe
to Doil
down
to chew
1^113
green
( 292 )
(Dtoitch
(2)DP. of
vehicles
teacher
Rfim
canal
word,
piece
ditch
^u
fiu
division
to
squeesse
^
moment
B^m
RkfM
nimble
rhytiim
^1
nightfall
to sup-
port
gong
1
e
1
*
pair
curved
{!) basin
(2)tofflng
104
(l)thing3
(2) of
§10.
n
X,
Common
Falling.
Low.
Acute.
DQI to
fi^ to go
ihi
deceive
too far
to grope
niu
jJlu
palmleaf
iw^n
(i) bald
ii million
iron
iKn
RTUvari-
gated
«iy ex-
amination
small
initial
Rising.
a title
nephew
niece
many
shoulder
Laos
i^ui to
question
Di
Iwi
Vi^
several
viki
(l)to saygimlet
goodbye
2)donkey
pheasant
tube
bucket
tin
ViK
to sleep
to wash
(298)
li ■ .
to drive
away
iKto
anoint
ihi to ex-
plain
V, spirits
to shun
iu
suppery
«i to
retreat
nti
to allure
to pass
through
careless
a shield
to caress
to feed
iclean
delay
w
meel
tU to
wobble
secret
\m to
, flow
^w« infat-
uated
to plane
to point
yard
to pare
stupid
dozen
back
(294)
§11. u
Jlf initial
Common.
Falling.
•
Low.
Acute.
[ Rising
«Q
t^o
roa
to bellow
rojfi
pot
un
doctor
•
aU
ant
um
nljtM
mjQ4
to stare
gong
1
dirty
UQClj
nUQU
mjQU
Peguan
mulberry
jJl
pillow
von
*4 \
to come
betel nut
win
much
horse
dog
V*
»v
jfe mos-
to thatch
to regard
quito net
inn
•
wJiiy
TOJlt]
plenty
widow
mark
i^i) \u
\vat j
^u not
Tli
^TOJ
why
new (
collection
IviJ- bum
timber
silk
pig
t
^
v^
to have
uproar
a bear
" ■ J VI ■
( 296 )
1) it
2)potatoe
*3) fat
un
drunken
vihi
diligent
firm
vSjx\ to
ferment
iin ad-
dicted to
ft
crushed
rice
ugly
|to kneel
imv to
hand over
barren
iT^xn
to con-
tract for
work
§12.
Common.
u
141
field
Falling.
ViW
custard
apple
beard
to flow
Uf)U
to sleep
N. initial.
Acute.
iJi
Low.
w in-
front
viti face aunt
t here
vXl debtlthis
massage
uQi calf ^^
of the leg younger
Rismg.
thick «
to run
away
meat
Vit4!3l
pus
worm
IVidf)
north
mi
remains
intricate
I
kin
spinning
wheel
Mr.
ill
to lead
IbeUy
to caress
a child
heavy
( 296 )
iT^til
rotten
to sit
mm
to retain
liiy
disgusted todissolve
iin
very
water
faded
vXis
leather
\
i^u
where?
§12.
Common.
^
w
bent
rru
work
m
hand-
Low.
I
some ,
m
sloping ti
angry
fork
easy
foolish
Acute.
win
satisfied
sticl^
Nff. initial.
Rising.
\b
to con-
ciliate
Vim to re-
cline
(297)
in lustre
h tree
trunk
hastify
JQU crooked bu stag-
gering
ir\ stupid i)i angry ivm sad
I spear
bent
forwards
crest
§13.
Common.
Nun
p. initiaL
Falling.
wn to
jump out
mi
clump
tropp
w bene-
diction
beyond
measure
to escort
\
2 atts
my
to row
to split
bamboo
Low.
pocket
m
cJl
cloth
cards
Acute.
wn
ku
to spit out beyond firuit
Rising.
eji
dust
rock
Ito turn
(298 )
fat
laft
MO
enough
elder
peppery
diamond
■
Utl
flat
to yield
ieii
family
to race
fio
father
fTo
to speak
angnly
On
wrong
poison
1 ghost
2 corpse
to burn
§ 14.
Common
tJu to mix
«
idlyo to run
after
J-i to throw
tliu equal
d year
^ crab
itJi tppump
iJ %P.iB.
Falling.
tlu to make
small
ill jungle
^lu string
i oboe
* grand
father
iili to blow
Low.
iiJftjQ sour
til aunt
tfiu obtuse
fl Chinese J eyes
poll tax naif closed
tf. target
initial.
Rising.
(2^)
§
15.
J
R. Initial
Common.
Low.
Acute
•
( jfi to sprinkle
•< in taste
(n) carriage
nj
to smoke
(of a fire)
iu
umbrella,
shade
•
fi
to tremble
h
to be leaky
H
fence hedge
nil
at intervals
1
music
hi
fierce
\
hole
i
dull
X
know
h
to dance
h
continually
a
nest
n
topuU tight
n
mouldy
1
n
to ramble
h
rotten fish
in
we
Ui
eagerly
:m
trace
WM
blunt
h)tj
hundred
nvi.
to rush in
nu
eager
hi
shop
nj
confused
rii
shape
h
to desert
\
something
li
acre, field
u-
poor
im
strength
im
a sieve
ii}}
vulture
XQU
to cut off
mu
to whet
hiii
hot
jf)^
(1) to place
under
(2) deputy
untidy
boat
nD4
ditch
fe^ to cry to sing
to
6q
m
dawn
fading
So
(i) rain bow
(ii) length
slow, long
( 300 )
§16.
Commoii.
dim
ti« to do
fl f^ U 9 (Yl})
S. initial.
Royal
prefix
rm stag-
gering
Falling.
KOI
envelope
rm
to spread
Yinti
to send
a part
illuminate ing place
fnu coarse
cloth
sand
a trap
Low,
( lOJvine-
\ • gar
orange
Acute.
KfW
hid-
tumult
obstinte
to move
to & fro
to put
bowels
•fei
left hand
certainly
Rising.
nil
to add to
w to
take up
mu
garden
froi
two
fnu to
plait
mnlaw
court
frv es-
sence
1) string
2} late
"U to
push
Upure
clean
I:
■1!^
AH.".!
rsoi )
113
to wash
in
torpid
sign of im-
perative
four
mat
mh sad
jfwfij
for the
purpose of!
iVi a perch|to jest
stick
4
rib
clothes
[i^H
to shake
to sign
^n
seducer
mj mmce
M word
short
4q trust
worthy
1^
nerve
a set
1
^0
to buy
vinj to
wipe
wealth
«n3
girl
Saturn
i«n a post
colour
tiger
lerable
( 302)
IfTlJ
to pene-
trate
pale
to peck
violin
to prop up
fcnl to
transform
«nti evil
smell
ff9i bushel
{^{"animal
fTwfi true
iUW
nnu
to know
f(t\
thinness
ononeside
end
-ID
to slander marrow
squinting
Yntq fling
against
to de-
nounce
9^ ripe
i^nf Venus
0*" happy
fork
to hide
ihu to
exercise
to super-
impose
7^(1) to
hide
(2) to
whisper
(3) ^
naughty
pain
fiu debt
ftu sacred
precepts
white
to teach
I p«^
imr
§ 17.
Common.
(303 )
tl -TI a W Tfl J
TiQ aque-
duct
10 to
weave
mm
gold
Falling,
beans
punt pole
to throw
out
to paint
Low.
all, over
T. initial.
Acute. I Rising.
'^Tim
'
perverse
to
wade
tTwto
deliber-
^ ate
mutual
ml if
to dread
stomach
yii(i)wharf|provoke
(ii) ap-
pearence
to guess |to purge
irnu
you
long purse
Yll
to
tlDI
to elbow
my
to retire
tn to
sharpen
1^
astern
t\v to
clear the
ground
tlTU
basis
(304;
i'
P
^
1
t
flat
1
V
dull
uneven
bag
tomb
UYII
uk
ii!f4 to
to prick
ingot
miscarry
liny
111
\ to
Siamese
to redeem
1
plough
1T1
to kneel
{
t,li(i)ashes
(ii) eaual
iwi old
man
foot
assort-
ment
emu
•
justice
••
,51 to do,
.to make
cave
p
t^
ti^«
t§
tij
trail
anvil
all
pail
fi
^
^
occasion
dense
1
(i) place
[ii) which
i6yi t^
1
nid-day 1
(
iispute
■^■•n
mn^-sr-
( 805 )
§18.
Common.
ri5 body
ftf] stake
nm banana
leaf
6 pound-
ed rice
un^ melon
In entrails
9\
Falling.
iIq to add
before
i«i oven
n: In} scissors
w birdlime
i?i to pound
nu to wake
up
P to em-
bezzle
•
uw to ar-
range
In to creep
ini tortoise
nrlfii mouldy
«^ arm
chair
«*"! low
wBti to strike
Low.
^ dwarf
0^ dimness
of sight
ib^ must
wu shallow
simple
^ cup-
board
initiaL
Rising.
^ ticket
f
\ torch
tJi under
iJ^i cross
piece
n:\iS pert
w1 to es-
tablish
0^u small
iwi dice
(
)
§19.
1
IF.
iftttinl^
CcMiiinon. ■ Falling.
Low.
Acute.
Riang.
71 i
i
31
S
wah j
to say
geioa !
TV
TOV
1
)1t
to place
valley
vacant
qncjons
jTMtoem-
i ployhelp
niiu
to sow .
VOIU
Bweet
Ttu to
^ifi
)iti
decrease
to swim
tocryout
in terror
rattan
Jfave
viYn
1* to
salute
^i»keep
to shake
catarrh
temple
•
«
nfi
palace
to hope
-TT^HV^^m
^iw
§29.
Common.
UQU
to consent|tapering |habitually|to dye
medicine
U1I india
rubber
Falling.
QUI
do not
otnn
to want
sort
y-Rj grand
mother
111
spider's
web fibre
to shoot
mosquito
big
vain
to cut
( 307 )
Low.
Y. initial.
tnhji grass
^ipatemal
grand
mother
difficult
smoked
meat
Acute.
Rising.
^u
m pieces
ihii to
remove
girl
( 308 )
to respect
*
to watch
not yet
yo^ to
clean out
to oppress to repeat
to stnke
to explore manent
to slacken
to get bold
tji per-
UDU to
oscillate Iconceal
Si
to defer
dfeu to
arrogant
<(
tt
Notice.— The columns in this appendix marked
falling" and "low" should have been marked
deep " and "dropped" respectively also cf. Chap. V.
'r—r,
( 309 )
APPENDIX B.
A List op Common Words having two or
MORE Diverse Meanings.
n
m crow teapot
nn^^sj pavillion to rush upon
AyiiSx village head man presents
ffii together to prevent
un: sheep to carve to scratch
ah old ripe to ( dat )
ah glass beloved
ifiuQ to connect to reap
nKi bold seed plot for rice
fifiou bolt rhyme rafter
ifix island to arrest to perch
ntj frog plane full
nou to mix to draw up endowed
ifiu footstool to run aground
inn: armour brittle
njou frame dried
fijon alley lean to make to swallow
(810)
H
11 1^, section Interjection calling at-
*tj to drive to repel to sing f *®"*^^°
11 to open animal fat
f u to sing (of birds) funny, to stretch,
Ai to enter rice ^^^
m horn hill he she they
■
im entirely to be broken
u'ln Nonmongolian Asiatic visitor
i^fi ball of cotton to be corrected
k dregs addicted to odd number
A^i to torment eye tooth
no elephant goad to ask for
nu feather fur to remove goods
nm of (sign o/possessive) goods
non to tie nearly empty to scrape
Hi leaf stalk to broil
4o fetters joist
rti word mouthful
fiu to itch rod D.P. of carriages
Ri« to gird to conjecture
Ru to associate lantern
ILJHI ^ J
(311)
tfDu hammer to squint to look cross
iRu small prawns accustomed to
9^ to rub moment
§ ditch to call from afar
Rou to spur to plait
^n prison to bend the knee
^M night to give back
n ivory teelseed
|y to bite to half-open
^u to seize to roost to reflect light, to
^Tfi attap from f®^^*
4i to remember, obliged, to imprison
-^Tu plate, to write with a stylus, diluted
^w to prepare strong
^M poor until
-^w to mark to agree ^di wo^ proud
^n to write down to reach to taste
^n colic sheaf cork tuft of hair
^f\ to rub point to light
(312)
fiu I to dine (of priests)
in tea cramp
41 slow rude
n-m edge male
^ steep rosin
i^^ basis intention
-B^ time wicked
-jfu to steep to transform the shape
-wfi rat great grand father
1^0 ferment family
^n to wash clothes to interrogate
Ifn to denounce to fling against
%XAX fork to repair
i-io: awkward ignorant
fiTw solitary to mow
•?i blacky to weave, to dine, to transplant
iftu side stubborn allotted task ^^^
fi good gall
^f^^*^r"«-
r8i8 )
fiu unripe in good condition
t\f\ to flip to lever up to kick to
i«x to split wood to repulse [disentangle
^0 blunt obstinate
ifitiu month worm
«■» eye old man
Rn lap to draw water
«") to pound to prick
«!)• to add to bargain
tii to take flight (birds) to sharpen
n^ cave box
fiu abundant to embank to enamel
^in . cheap to touch correct
fiQ * to carry to observe to stand on
one's dignity
i^Du wild fraudulent illicit
n
711 landingstage, to wait for, appearance
lifiy Siamese free
lYii ashes equal
^ who (relative) place
viQ^ to throw to fry
Yiw to go against lance to strike
(814)
U
vsOfi
front season
iin
much expert
(hj
soft scaly ant eater
fe
finger inch
vtum
pus marsh
Hu
raw cotton tender
ifio
meat deer
u
ij-i shoulder overflowing
\u leaf sail D. P. of round objects
t}iu to turn aside afternoon
tiiu to blossom folds of a door
vv village thin marsh
iui light not heavy to go slowly to
make water
UTY) tical foot
tiin to wound a period of 6 minutes
iftfi fishhook fragment
fj^ dysentery twisted lazy
UM on vow
uf\ to powder to iron clothes cloudy
(816 )
ll
itn
to fix to embroider
a
Chinese poll tax pounded
dM
to shine to draw out
tlfti
to fine to level
J
crab to spread a carpet
u
to turn widen
wnj
iin
to fry to paint one's face delay
iiljQ
to sweep brilliant
a
ghost corpse
eisj
I hair
(J
^■) to disobey, daring, palm of the hand
sole of the foot
d1
wall lid
diu
on the pait of addicted to
itfi
to watch.to go to an audience of the
King or Princes
d
boil skill
du
rain to rub
idcti
to become worse very bitter
nm
inrt
ftn
«u
Am
vSifi,
(316)
N
to plant
stomach
to difliinite
dazzling
because
melodious
carpet
to sprinkle
garland
chain indigestion
a
liberal
handful
pumpkin
to hatch ^gs
tooth
to stab
straw
dark
abundant
to take care of
y1
fin
horse stool
timber vowel, accent
silk a fine sign of a question
oily polished he, she it, potatoe
flea first
although similar
to cure section
medicine tobacco to cover with
to retire to make a sign"^
^IP
tfl
(817;
to fear to cut in pieces
^1 to oppress to strike
li^i to crack open plentifully
itu evening cool
^Q a large net to praise
^u to make short, wrinkles
to cast (metals) to diminish (of a
smoked meat, to jump [swelling)
31 to stop mouldy
i\^ season menstruation
DTI root to vomit
in to love armpits
ru indistinct railway line
JTJ body rough copy
iU near to edge
fn to extract sect.
jSu hundred to string
"t jy to wither to scatter
jn untidy after-birth
jou to hover to whet to winnow
nj ear of com to dig
^ dawn glittering
(318)
n
^'1 donkey to say good bye
^^ to hunt sky to retreat
!" secret to sharpen
to drive away to examine
bed of a river D.P.of boats, logs^&c
interpreter to fasten with a rope
spring threshing-floor active
bald a million
fhi to wash to execute criminals
^f\ to grow large short cut (road)
ii«^: and to flay beams to support
u« and to look [columns
MM to sail to run (of a vehicle)
ib wheel to provoke
nu hasty to expose to the fire
iXn to cease to lift up
mn royal Luang (a title)
in to draw up with the hand, category
9\ to measure temple
wft to have a cold to write a running*
ax to stop aslant ^^^
t^ comb bunch of bananas
■■■^■^■^■^MVf^MB^M ■ I J I I . I
(319)
n
An war to search (for knowledge)
mt pond to wash vowel
tm late rope
}m teak to tattoo to dig cf . Chap. 25
[§14 page 130
tmn to repress, final consonant,to enchant
wSn sculpture bolt
frilf) pirate to shake off
ifitj a set food
fc to order to blow the nose
to} girl to pull a string
ilhi nerve 20 wahs D.P, of string
uw rays of the sun sword ^^^' *^-
^ colour, mill stone, beautiful, to rub
itrz timid to unravel chronic
fvu to please to meet
Im orange sour
floi becoming to join
fu to smoke tobacco to suck to pump
fou garden to verify
^n ripe cooked vivid
(320 }
VI
w plague measure of rainfall
w to look for, without (negation)
wT^ to be lost to be cured
^^f\ to exercise herpes
ftu box to press sugar-cane between
WDU asthma to pack up Lrollers
wn six to fall down
Vi'u to clothe oneself to press down
vioaj perfume onion
wu times way
vQi to be anxious about ring of a chain
wfi to scourge to mow sugar mould
^xi puppet mould
Stj musty damage
^ first (month) low fellow !
iiQu to hide oneself box
you self
ifffi one noise
^ reed to stammer oh !
^Q * rather deaf tumult
fifi a draught of water turbulent
m^m^^
(321)
ENGLISH— SIAMESE
VOCABULARY.
N. B. This vocabulary merely contains the
words used in the exercises and passages for
translation from English into Siamese m this
book.
^ Agreement wiirira ^nji
A an v\{l} i^uQ to be used All
with a suitable designa-
tory particle
hv^Vi hh
mi
About iJjsjTni
Round about ^e! jq^
Abuse, revile ^i
According to ^-^^
Address— ^-^
to speak to
Address (place) ^q^, ^^tia
Advance (to) ifi^ W ft,
Afternoon i'^-^ u^y
Again gn ^ vi^> on
Ago jji aK^
Agree «n «4 fiu^fi rqijj wo Is
All day long Juffifii
Almost ifiou
Alms Y)iu
To ask alms loifnu
Always iwijo
Amount (of • -. ini
money) -^^^^^^^^
And u» uft: fiu
Angry tna
Another SnSiw^* 6u
Another person ruou
Ant 34W
Answer mu
Any inj
( 322 )
Anyone Wlii^tfi
April ijjtt-Rjy
Appearance a,,p iv^ftou
— dear piyuj Jj-mg
Army noi *iw
Around jqu
Arrest <{j "Ij^
Arrive
Ashes
At
At all
At first
At once
Bank of a river nXi
Bank note lAi nsrfin^ luitin)^
Bam
Barrack
Bangkok
Bathe
Beat
«3
At present i^tj; {4 k iTt^n ^
Att
Aunt
Away ^in» 1jh)||» uwlna
B.
Bad
Bald
Baker
Bamboo
Biank(money) iiuifi Fi^iIhilBet
Beautiful (of persons) tm
Beautiful (of things) m
Bear (animal) viti
Because iwn: uvm
Bed iwtji
Bed room v\St uqu
Beef ififi
Before (time) noij
„ (place) -Jliiii
Beggar
Begin
Behind
Believe
Belong
itJu "Dm
(323 )
Betel nut wm
Between lusn^?^
Bill (account) (in vXishi ifitj
„ (notice) iJamiw
Bill collector ru ifiu iJU
Bite fiR
Sird un
Black rfi
Blacksmith "ffvivtSin
Bloom uui
Blind ni tion
Blow (wind) fJw
„ (an instrument) iili
„ (n.) mjwij
Blotting paper njiwiw Ifu
Blue (light) ^1^1
(dark) ^i^ifl4» nnu
Boat ifh
Boatman d fckj* ru ifo
Bold nKi wToj
Book viu^^Qy fr^R
Bom (to be) iflR
Borrow lo ()«
Both ^ ITQI
Bottle rm
Box ftu
Boy (child) iJin ^ -btii .
„ (servant) tlo^
Break ifi unn
9, a limb ifn
Bread iw d^
Brick fi]}
Bride i?Ji irn
Bridegroom i4l ijt^
Bring ibi • • • • m
Brother (elder) ^ ^"m
„ (younger) U&^in?j
Buffalo R^
Build rfij
Bury di
Busy fimjjjin* fitpruin
Business n-v ^
Butter luw
Buy fe
But ilR
f 324)
ff
}9
By means of t«u ^
By means of this Inu u
a.
CaU iftjn
Cake Duoj
Can Ifc
Cannot \i 1)i
Canada tJinififi Rnrrii
Canal Hf)c»
Card (playing) "Ifi
(visiting) rrt« i^^aj
(of invitation) \rm
Carpenter 'iu lli
Careful loi 1^ ^i
Be careful srS
Carriage jti
Carry tio
Cat ii^jQ
Catty
Catch <b
Cave rn
Celebrated u ^o i^^i
Certain iiU
4i
A. certain man Fiu viw
Certainly itluuu
Chair ifh fc
Change(v.) itliiuu
Change (money) iHi ii»n
Chance (n.) tomfr
By chance lafiu
Cheque lu ifln iAi i^fi
Cheap nm ^n
Cheese mu u^i
Chew ifiw
Chili wJh
Child gn iSin
Chimney (of lamp) wrofi
, , (of mill) daw
China iIwyir ^u
China wareiR^Joi irui
Chinese i^n
Cigar ^^
Cigar tube nzfei y v6
Cigarette ^^ ^uS\
Clean (adj.) mm
„ (v.) i^« Vfill^.wfnw
( 325 )
Climb
Gimate
Cloth
Clothes
Coal
Coast
eft
Coachman ru 4 u ki
Cocoanut joifb
Coffee m nil
Collect it^u • • Ir
Colour ^
Come m
Company won
Mercantile Co. uf Svi
Considerable f}%Jif }Jin itiu
fiUJJTI
Consult d^nw
Convict (v.) wW
„ (n.) unW
Coolie 9$
Cook y«f] ^T}
Copy (v.) Ron -^w
Comer tw ^jj
Correct ?^
• • •
li-D
Cost (n.) nHi
Cotton ^
„ woolm^
Count Cu
Country iJninw
„ as opp.
to town tllu uon
Covered i^
Coyan mi^u
Crab J
Cremation nii biv
Crowd v^
Crucible i!ji
Cup dgy
Cupboard |
Cure Jhtin w-m
Curry um
Cut «w
D.
iCfti
Dark !if\
am ^u
Day Si
Daytime iwin«Ti)u
( 826)
Day after to-
morrow i»w «
Day before yes-
terday Truiviu
Deaf ^wujn
Dear. uiu
Dear me! u«t» I
Diamond ti^w
Dice irfi
Die (v.) witi
Different from Qn flu
Different kind nn *]
Difficult y-m
Dim Hi
Dine fti tlctiiu o-mu
Dining-room ittM fti otwti
Dinner
Dirty
Discover
Disease
Dislike
Dismiss
Disturb
Divide
Do
Do not
Doctor
Dog
Down
Dozen
van fVm
frntJni ittou
nu
^ ODD itl i^y
V5ilft^ Tiii
ubi vn
Drawing-room iSa
Dress (v.) uwfe
(n.) ifo
Drink (v.) flu *«
(n.) tta kii
Drive (v.)*uJ«^
„ awayl«
Drum n»oj
Drunk wi mKi
Dry (adj.)uftj
(v.) nin ufifi
Duck
Dumb
Dust
Dusty
in
( 327)
E.
Each ipn
Each man f\u ut
Earth 9iu
Earth(The) tan
Easy
Easily
Eat
Egg
Elder
Elderly
Electric lighter! lii
Elephant "^
Employment rm nu tfi jd„ ' „
Europe tftil ytnJ
European J*
Evening loiii i(lu
Ever iRU
EvCTy ^n •]
Everybody pn •] fiu
Evelywhere intT] iiw^fclil
Every time i\n<l
Explain tjSbiu
Extinguish Ku
P.
Fair nw «rw
„ —light 1173
Endeavour aw q «1 Is
End ilaiti ^ gn
End of the month ^u iftou Farmer
England
English
Enough
Envelope
Equal
Especially \m miit^
Fare
Farm
m^
•813 \n
flWT
Fat
Father
Fence
Fetch=call Id iftjn
„— bring liliQ>--in
Fever 1^
( 828 )
Few uh i!i)u
Field ui
Find wu «i
Fine (ad.) m
„ (n) (V) rlib
Finish tfillt H^
■ Fire 1»l ififi«
First t wiii
Fish (n.) rlui
„ (v.) nniJ»i
Five t^
Flax Jtiy
Flower non ^ii
Fly (v.) ei4
Fold ffu
Pond -ffBu ffi
Food fitj i^i Qimj
Fool Ru ti
Foolish ti
Foot Ru 1^1
f, (12 inches) ^Fi
For ffiwft
Forget ^n
Fork TOij
Fortune irjt^
Four ^
France tJn:iif)f^ «Jj^iBfi
Friday 3u ^nf'
Friend iAqu
Fruit cj« "te lyii'te
Fuang i?[m
o.
Gamble im ifiti
Gambling house t» tiou
Garden inu
Gardener ri4 tfi frtu
Gentleman ru ^ ^
Get up ^n ^\i
Ghost d
Girl § wftji wftj^ 2? 13
Give ioi • • • JJ1 IK
Glad ^ Is
Glass ^ ah
Glue m3
Go \1
( 829 )
Go out oon^il Hat vam
Gooutforawalkltlifiu^RuHe, him i'bi un
Goout for a ride lili^ug^sll Head tfi ^m
Go out foradriveliii^tj^ m
Go round v^ mv
Good ^
Goodbye in now
Good natured 1^ fi
Goose viiu
Grandfather ^ ni
Granary ini Ai
Grass Hp
Green nug
Ground Ru ^
Grow ran
„ of personlwry ^u
Gun
Hail
Hand
Happy
Harvest
Have
H.
ffiifitJ
Ad
Headache tJwf!)fl:
Health
Hear
Heavy
Help
Hen
Here
High
Hold
Hole
Holiday
Home
Hope
Horse
Hospital
Hot
In
l« wyitJia
K)T4
„=peppery itn
Hotel . toiSio
House tllu
However (i« oy v ii
( 880 )
How muchivii \
Hundred ibv
Hungry 9a
Hurt (adj.) i^ti
„ (v.) iHiJHi
Husband tH
I.
I (ill »u 'hhi
Ice ill u^i
Icecream Io-Z^t^
If tft
If so dloti'ttYKi
HI liv
In \xi -fiilvi
In front of "fw til
Inste ad of uyiu
Imprison fin ^n 4i ^n
Inch ^t
India tJ»yiff fluilitj
Indian uin
Inform uon 1j^ f
Information 'lu
iiherit ( of fortune) jh
Ink 1^
Inkstand ns^n i^
Inn tiriJfa if(n i
fon keeper i^ iw \mtn
In order to mo nz
Invite ilni
Invitation ffi tftu
J.
Jar ro]g
Jmnp ructfin
Jungle tii
Just now i^ fcfi
E.
Keep
Kill
ilm (animals)
Kind (sort) oii-tt
„ (adj.) U ^
Kindly ^ 1^ r^cui
„— please 10
IKindness miun^pi
mm
( 831 )
Kitchen
Knife
Know
L.
Lad i?(n ^tm
Lamp nrifim
Landing stage Yii
Laos n-Q
Lprge Iwnj Ir
Last ^ Vi^i
Last month iAqu nou {1
Last week Difiwtf'fiou fi
Last year dfiR-njfi
Late WYiii frm
Laugh vikx
Lazy ^ifiys
Leaky h
Learn fjtju
Leave oon ^m
Left hand +«j
Left ivi^Q
Leg n
Letor allow \^
„ (a house) Itt'iirT
House to let tllu hi
Letter i^iK^o ^nvtxi-Kj
Light (v.) ^fi
„ (adj.) itJi "Ijjwilfi
„ (n,) triulfl
„ (adj.) «fTw
Like (v.) TOu
„ (adj.) iwflfiti
Listen fti
Little if(n il!)tj
Live (v.) 0^
„ (adj.) fi^'iM
Loaf tftiu (nujj di)
London ifim t^Qunou
Long yT3
Look p uQj
Lose (v.) ^iviiy
„ (not to win) utlr
Loud m
(882 )
Low fti ifctj
Low qualily ^^'^
Machine <^( iffttw <h(
Mad tH
Magic
Make
Malay
Man
Many
Manger
March
Margin
Hi
Market nt)in
Mat i^
Matches V^fi ^
Matter ivi^ rm
Whatis the matter idiitr'L
Meat i{it)
Meddle ngu
Medicine ui
Meet wu il:
Mend ut^
Military band v um vin
Mine tjQ uj
Miner hu ^pi ui
Minute (adj.) i^n*]
„ (of time) UT^ Mn
Mistake Qn i«Si
Moment rfhfywAi
Money ift*
Monday Si ^My\{
Month i^Qu
Moon fiiz ^uTif
Morning n«-i i%i
Mosquito y^
Mother nu irsfn
Mouldy fl n tu
Mountain ^i^i
Mouse vi\f
Mousetrap iR^iKn^u
Mouth ilm
Much
Must
Mutter
( 388 )
My
Myself
Name
Narrow
Nature
Near
Nearly
Neck
Needle
Nephew
Net
New
News
N.
URti
ifiou
RQ
113
Night nui! ftu
Night time ^ixa ni^iY fiu
Late at night An
Nightfall iMittirfi
No not "lijlir "Ui itJ«T
None luOit^u ^iDW
Noon ni)i \^\^\
Not at home lu f)|/ t]1u
Not very lij \
Nothing lii fl q:1j
Note (n.) ^^wjiy
November wt]«Smyu
Now 1^3 fi
o.
Newspaper «^n wra iw^
wMb
New Year «yi
Never i»y
Next «o Id WD fiu
Next day i^^ fi
Next month iftou will
Next week oTflwd wtH
Next year d vull
Ij^lj Obliged. —must ife^
,, pleased £l rtui Quli
Oboe d
Often uoy •]
Oil ^^ Jiu
kerosene oil uVim fiipr
Of course Kiuu
Old (of person) vk\
(884 )
Old (of thing)irn tunw
On tjii +ij tiu
Only (oheonly)iliu3
„ (adv.) itiifiu
Open (v.) idfi
Opium \y\ Au
Opposite n» f\M ¥ui
,, = other side of the|paknampo lim \fi tw
river flm i^ I Ju
Or nft]
Orange Ku
Order (v.) fc
„ (n.)rfTfe
,, (series) uti? ^
In order to i^o *i:
Other 6u
Oven i«"i
Owe itiu vifi
Owing to iwnrifu
Owner iif^ -jq,
Pail efi
Pair g
Paint Til ^
Palace S
Royal palace nisra £
Pale (adj.) wtii^w
Paknam ilmi^
Packet
Paddy
P.
iVi itlfion
Paper narfm*
Part «riu
Passers by ru ^ iRu lu tiuu
Passing place vi Vilin
Patient(adj. ) fi rtoj if^u;
„ (n.) pixiAu
Pattern m otj-tf uutj
Pay ^"w iJU
Pen iJin m
Pencil Ru m)
Perfectly tny jou flou
tnu uu
People
Person
TfW Jlttgj RU
RU
„ =one's own self jfi it^
( 835 )
Pick^choose ilon
Pick up ifiti
Pig w^
Place ^ uva Wmn
Plank fw:«Tu ^
Plant (nO iJu wc^
„ (v.) iwx ijjn
Plate sTu
Play ii5u
Play polo n Hii
Please no i^nj
„ (v.) TOU U
Pleased
Pleasant
Plenty
Plough (v. )^tiiii
Poetry um drbu
Poison yi WrJj
Poisonous i) f)HJ!j
Policeman fit) njuTu
Police station 'tw fin
Poor ^u
Possible \^f iiiu'ltJl^
d R794 Qufif n Is
Post i«n
„=(duty)viil1^
„ (military ^ wn ifiviTj
Post office t«liJjw<i(j
Pot wIjq
Precious stone vv^ou
Prefer iiou fi ra
Present (n.) no^ tItuu
„ (adj.) oy WQ will
Present time m^ i^u^ fi
At present iIru
Presently dnwwQ
Pretty «Qy ^ui
Previously t\lm
Price Jim
Procure wi *lln
Procession iiw
Promise you Snjnji
Properly tny wjjrtj
Prosperous fl r^uj i-^fnj
Province vimnia
Pull M ain m
Pulldown ^Q
( 336 )
Pure
W tA^vlli
Put
ioi • • • W
101 • • • ^
Q.
Quick
A
Quickly
XftvA
Quiet
i^u ti
R.
Race (of 1
nankind) iiR
„ (horsed uiJ jJi
Railway
,^y
Rain (n.)
flu
1
„ (V.)
(Junn
Rarely
nkiv tiiDu
Rather
^ UT) S^ flTI
Razor
fintnu
Reach
m t\^
Read
QTU
Really
^fl ii<f *fti
Reap
ih^i
Rebuild
flffif ku \m
Receive
TtJ
Reception
ro<mw&f!juiinl
Recognise 4i^)i
Red iim
Remain oj,
Remains ivifiE)
Repeat iiW giYigu
Reply RQtj
Rest (v.) UDU lliifin
„ (n.) ^*»n
9 9 (adj.) iviu^it^iQ
Rest of life i^DQn ^;
Restore nlfu Su ^u 1^
,, (health) JfittilfcdjnR
Respect (v.) iiijfio
In every respect lu ^n
Return nSu ui
Revolve w^u
Rice iTii
Rickshaw Jtii^n
Ride 4 all
Right ^n
Right (hand) nn +ij lii
Ring (n.) uwtu
( 837 )
River
Mi^h
Scratch
iniw5
Road
mm
Scythe
Ufi i^U7
Rock
ViU {l«1
Sea
KiU
Room
tfe*
Season
^e
Rotten
u mtii
Secret
nm Ku Su
Row (order) urn
See
i^M n
„ (a boat)
u<)3iib
Sell
HRJ
„ (noise)
fin fiK^n
Send
^•••* 111
Rule (v.)
Hi^n
Send away cItti — -"111
Ruler
w'5tli
Seriously
wn iw^ <Jj <}
,, (wooden) "^thifiw
Servant
iriul¥
Ruled (line) ihi Cufin
Seven
i^fi
Run
aid
Sharp
RU
s.
Sharpen
JJU ll^ FIOJ
Sad
myl^
Shield
\«
Saddle
!nu33i
Shoot
Qi
Salung
nh
Shop
hi ?^
Salt
inSf]
Shopman
inu ^1^
Same
iwou fiu
Short
hi
Saturday
Tiiifinf
„ (of persons) i^u
Sawk
ran
Shoulder
til
Say w
g il> UBfl 71? ikl Ql
Shout
Ym im^ m
School
tw iftiu
Show
^
( 888 )
* —
Siam tfim ^TiU'tiniYin tm-oi
Son v"^ '•^
Siamese
Inti m^ l-nu
Soon Ji rimhm
Similar
ivtfiouilU
Sow WTU
Since
h iM
Spacious n)ii tni
Sit
16
Spare time imi ^
Six
wn
Speak fffi 7)
Sky
lii
Spectacles utu ni
Slave
tlTW IJT3
Spirits iwlii ^
Sleep
UQU UQU T^2(tJ '
iSplit eii
Slow
*
Spoon 4bu
Small
itir\
Square ^ m^uij
Smell (v.
) nu
Stag riTii
„ (good;
1 Vif}}J
Stamp(v.)ii3=^tj (foot
M ibad)
iviSu
„ (seal) ilirfitj «n
Smoke (v.
)fftj v^^
„ (n.) iRrun>j{i
,f (n.)
FlSi
„ (n.) f^\\ljn^^
Snake
t
Stand (v.) Qu
Snatch
vidu
Start Qon ^m
Snow
ft}j:
Stay QJ/
Soil (n.)
Ku
Steal mrtuu
Soldier
tiwu
Steamboat tfti.nulf!
Some
thj 1
Stick (n. ) In
Sometimes uii ^
„ (v.) Rw
( 839 )
Stone Ru
Stop
Storey
Story flmu
Stomach iffii
Stomach achetJgfi iib^
Storm ny
Stout ^
Street nuu
String iSon
Strong im im
Stupid ti
Sugar \^ nif)
Sufficient ihq
Sun f^^ifind
Sunlight ufif)
Sunday )u oifind
Sure im
Surprised nnl^
Suit of clothes i^t ififtj
Suit (sight) V. 1^1 «i^
Sweet v^T^
Swim ;^ ^T
T.
Table \k
Table cloth cfi ^ tfc
Tail wTj
Take adi Id
Take away abi • • • -Id ihi
Tale flyiTu
Tall 9^
Take care sdi
That, those \m
They, them im
This, these fi
Target iui
Taste
Tea
Teacher
Tell
Temple
Than
vift^Then
There
uv\
ViU
There is, there are fi
Therefore iwjxniSu
( 840 ;
Thief irtjjy
Thin (of person) uo:
„ (of things) uiT
Thing iw
Think . fin fin
Thirty «njj ftu
Though wn ii
Thread ^
Three tmi
Through waon
Thunder Jii jSj
Thursday Siwt]wnufi
Tical uTTi
Tiger i^n
Time u«i
Time (long) uiu
Tin - wyn
Tin mine tio iii ^un
Tired iw^otJ
To ^ ^
„ (dative) ah
To-day tu fi
To-morrow ^^fi
Too
iftu
roo late
4lifTu1d
Too much
ifliild
Together
wfelJ fi\A> ifej flu
Tortoise
iRl
Total
mi
Town
ifioi
Trader
wo ^^
„ petty trader ru tkj moi
Train
juniJ
Tram car
jn ni jti Id
Tram conductor ru iilti fij
Tramway
yiujtirw
Tramway
Co. uiWiJtirtf
Travel
ifiuYnj
Traveller
\ ifiU Till
Tread
indtJU
Tree
rfulfc
Try
»Qi Q 9»ifi
Trustworthy 4b
Turban
ell twn Ar:
Turn
wii
Turn down vk
Twenty 6 Su
Two frtii
Typhoid fever ^% flw
U.
Umbrella hj
Uncle ^1
Under *ihi nv
t
Underneath Df
Unripe Rti
Use 1%
Useful fi djrtoifii
V.
Vacant w
Valley- wttj iin
Valuable fi nfii im
Verandah snfiy^
Very >nn tin
Visit i^u^j .
(341 )
IWall
Wages
Wah
Wait
Walk
Walking stick ^i^i
71
\Y
99
Want woimj oyin
Wash /JV
Wash clothes if\
Washerman ru ^n iwo
Waste ih} dSo;
Watch (n.) uilHnrin
(y.) i^T
Watchman Ru itfi tlluRutJixi
Water i^ "
Way (road) y\v yiximv
method 11
We m
EnriTR
tnftRd
Well (healthy) mi^ fi
Well known i^ ru ^ ^n tlU^
Wet id^n
Weight \^ Viux]
>>
Wealthy
Weapon
Weather
Week
Weep
Well
ItJu iRm^
(342)
When ifta
When ? iftali
Where ^ ^Mu
Whereupon ^j
Whether vSt
While ^nc An
Whisky mifi ftrfl
White iTJ
Who ^ 4*
Who? W
Whoever ^w^ ^ 1»>
Why *^^^ii
wide nJw
Widow uu rohu
Wife ifiy ^JJ^i
Win iinj:
Winner ^ imc
Window v\tti wn
Wine o4^
Wish 1I0U oym
With ^ t«y
With draw tiou Bon
Wood (forest) ili
V
„ (timber) IjJ'
Wooden i!i ^ Id'
Word A^
Worth seeing Ui p
Work (n.) Tiu ^ nu
„ (v.) ihvM VhtiTj
Write i4w
Wrong incorrect QpiIjj ^n
„ (bad) ife
Y.
Yard (3ft.) viiii
Yard (court yard)!muiwt]yi
Year d
Yellow ti wloi
Yesterday jiu fi
Yes i{:
Yonder tiKi
You YITU lf{| l-^l
Your
YITU it^
Young
Zero
z.
mrawa
^ra
- (343 )
SIAMESE ENGLISH
VOCABULARY.
This Vocabulary contains words with appro-
priate meanings for exercises and passages for
translation in this book from Exercise 46 onwards.
Many common words which occur m the earlier
part of the book have not been repeated in this
vocabulary. The Arrangement of words is as
follows. High words are marked *
(i) The letters are arranged in the order
of the Siamese alphabet.
(ii) The words under each letter are
ranged as follows.
A. Words whose first syllable ends in a simple
vowel.
B.
ff
>>
>>
99
„ sound of N.
C.
79
>>
>>
>>
„ 9, Ng.
D.
99
>>
>>
1*
„ 9, K.
E.
>>
>>
>>
J>
,9 99 T.
F.
>>
>>
>>
99
„ 99 P.
G.
•>
>>
>>
99
9, 9, M.
H.
99
M
99
99
„ diphthong.
(344)
n
fCiili bag packet njrflo
mf«x(l)basket(2)stomach nsnj^uuT^
nn^n looking glasslnnfioi
nc^ifi basket
(1) to rush upon (2) tent
nnfini plank
no
m
niJlwinj
n
hi
nir^i bell
fiRwifi paper
n^rtfifi to jump
narniy rabbit
unviii flower pot
fwnii to do
Ministry of War
Ministry of Agriculture 9^^
Minis, of Foreign affairs
Ministry of Local Govt.
Ministry of the Interior
Ministry of Justice Itnwn
un
In
buffalo
state procession
tile
what
sailor
King
to build
crow tea pot
coffee
bold
brave
behaviour
how many
what is the time
rose
virtue health
pollen
(l)to
far
hen
(2) old
near
neighbouring
liar
( 345)
lin«
irti h chair
iItSu ship
fliuw^ city wall
ni\ profit
tl-iQu to get worse
tliffi force
rliv^ufi fixed appointed
flu (1) with (2) to preven
TiHi to separate
my work, business
mjjiliny trade
rnj wilu betting
myjufRi war
a little
before
piece
to much
cage
middle
wide
Ayuthia
t^^ lYiw T Bangkok
ti^i iJ^ff Paris
to respect
bold
iiti: rapids
no^ heap, troop
nf)4 m^ iimi
secret police, detectives
t?ti
fiou
iflultJ
small box
cook
laws
to bite
■
actions
to hinder
angry
iuw rJtu lazy
iAyjRyjf honour
iniStin to hate
if\9\ to be bom
ntj i4l food
nmj back
rUu to cut with scissors
fitj to collect
nmifiTj committee
njJiAnwikmjEducationDep.
(846)
Ut%J
cheek
iiwi+i
I
iflU i
3ven accustomed
iVnun
officials
n^Tu
transformation
i^nvii^fpfium
n«T3
to tell to inform
High Commissioner
^^ (1) glass (2) valuable 1^
to ride
niJ5u
1
banana
<iftu^
idle
im-i
to connect
{lP({iUg
stingy
liiUQ ^!k
huM
grumbler
to have business with
nii^ to fear
\'i
«*g«
inip
island
i\i
feather, fur
41 1 k
fU
a title Ehoon
a
'fMwt nobleman officals
1104:
while
wnu
to hang up
k\u%i
thief
i^tiu
to .write
ii:u"Ki
to enlarge
AfmiiJ
' Paklat
no
to ask for
•iJ
to imprison
nOTITU
to beg for alms
iTiT toobstruct,opposition
hbW
to beg pardon
41}
side
^n
article, chapter
4ltlw
inside
in
leg
ttttiKi
yonder
HI fSilm
jaw
■JIjuoti
outside
uti
right hand
•iltviifj
behind
(347)
HOI
district
goods ri
nwflTiRi present gift
■
ihfru
(1) Indian
(2) visitor
angry annoyed
poor
Ai^
to salute
oiidep
l)entirely (2)to be broken
Rl
Irj
Rl
to dig
to cross
to sell
flute
n
lawsuit
to become wild
price
hire
namely
teacher
pair
to wish for
(1) word (2) piece
nQ YI7U beggar
'JUKI coadiman
Ru \i' servant
f\uim tnu passenger
Ru i^u Tifn conjuror
R^ smoke
R^ to separate
R)^i Rhj afraid of
^M 1) evening 2)to restore
R^u wave
^cu (1) a title (2) favour
^u iR^ intimate
1 RU stump (of a tree)
Rx ought to
R^ t^^ once upon a time
^ (u*i) dew
Ri^o^ canal
R1I ^1) screw(2)to brandish
iRut close to
iR^i materials apparatus
iRWrffiwi^ mousetrap
(348 )
if^Qi im tools
theatrical properties
Ron enclosure, corral
BR to bend
Ar to think
URR gas
Hit) complete
^u kheub
uRtj narrow
irSqu uRf^i to doubt
irSu infi^j to forget
r™ ifti -ftj^ opposition
RTOwol-i satisfaction
RTTwQu^ pleasure
R7DJ 91 happiness
to wait
to chew
to kill
enemy
to flog
stupid
reflection
work .
salary wages
iRTTw handsome, pretty
ny easy
s
confusedly
^1 chief
!B1
9>J to be in charge ofjl-^ ^s,^
tRu lantern
tRjjnII
large hanging lamp
im ever
■
RTO buffalo
RJTJ fi on this occasion
substance of an affair
l^ ^ good natured
!i4l nnj director
i4l nw proprietor
A^iwiihTm manager
<iu7u amount
(349)
^1 idu • important
4i iftu defendant
^u (1) poor (2) until
^iu dish
<u Chinese
i^u accustomed to, expert
t^jn*^ robber
<i v(Sm sub-district
-Jit true
^i then
li'J^ manifest
ii*Ji RTO to inform
<n to tear up
i^n Chinese
a^n siy to distribute
•^pi to note down
^ntuTKj letter
(1) strong (2) to prepare
ft
<f\ iisi to arrange
^m\-i heart
^n tasteless
?^
to light
^^Tl(i
plaintiff
<tJ
to catch, to arrest
iflilJ •
ill, sick
^JJ
to sink
^■RJ
to pay
u^^ wfu to row
4i
gable
l^X
to bore, to dig out
9
finn^
savage
UlKi
and so
iftWX
•
sufficient
R2)in
clever
if)iS:j i11umination,festival
I
9u
pungent
9«
to pull, to drag
BU WTU
ruined
iU^
indifferent, listless
U7ii
to seize
H
^ru:
to win
TdiR
kind, sort
(850)
4n
•roij
m
h iii<ii exp&into'point out
4q name
kti tfiui A famous
l^'mou to make use
of a person's services
i+i to rent
+n: to decide
-fo ..storey, grade, form
i'tfu for example
ihM spoon
-i6(l)to weight (2) catty
iliw^tiu ^ painter artist
-ffn IjS' carpenter
^n ipd(n blacksmith
• ■
4^ to snatch away
im gap,opportunity,hole
-ffn mi to box
to pull 7n w
to influence ^n
niany, plentiful 7« tw
distinct, legible 7x1
race, nation
connected
to wipe
to like
to praise
to taste
inhabitants
townsfolk, people
TT3«r7u garden
(1) bad (2) period
to trust, to believe
fiddle
on est
to buy
chain
naughty
to hide
naughty
pale
ruined
to hide
IIQlilKl
inu inu to repair
[•fkj
left hand
(361)
large, big
Annamite
9 (1) fierce (2) to scold.
9 Mu savage
In whoever
iti^ to command
pTu to break through
^7u custom hou£ie
fiu earth, ground land
unu no unu adjoining
tnu to collide
riou softly
flw hasty
i^Qu month
ril iKi and so
ffh to catch .
iSin child
non V' flower
unn Sun
i9\m to boil
to extinguish
uxanipe
at first,former
star
with
nafiui lamp
nnif): greedy
noiRi to lean on one side
fiiii nn west
n^ Qon east
n»ir) market
ni^Qfi through
rfo to join together
no Id for the future
9it}f to conquer
njif balance, scales
Ri^uu to despise
f cupboard
In fnu to interrogate
mi )
>n , stove, oven
(352 )
t^-um^ position
rank, appointment
nil
1
place, locality
low
oneself
plant
tree
(1) stopped up
(2) at a loss
to awake up
empty, clear
to remind
straight
to establish
various
nut^Ti besides,inaddition
URI
to arrange
to dress
bed
to fall
to be startled
nn \fi Bfny to be drowned
flfin tlf)i to fish
wfi \^ to carry water
ftn house, building
unn to break
wjon lane alley
«>i to cut
?ln to join
nns to inspect
■ •
nu to strike, to slap
wotj to answer
j?Sj to boil
WT34 to follow, following
to die
large
n
road, street
to offer, to present
permanent
to hold, to carry
to pull out
correct
(l)to(2)toreach
money bag
will
^1
( 368 )
v\v (1) to make slowe
(2) to sink ^
i()ui riu to quarrel
^n (i) cheap (2) correct
ti>) since after
tiQfi to take off
t\v to push with the foot
(1) abundant (2) enamel
(i) to redeem
to pour out
row line
to retire
cup
glass
account book
sea
toqiiarrel
soldier
to be cowardly
to paint
(1) landing stage
tl"KJ
til
times
mattress
very
equal
only
foot
why
appearencetiw
Yin
(1) to support (2) patient
Km punctual
mu-ZltTfitt punishment
yfu . capital, money
umM instead of
i^w candle
to be kind, to favour
Yiw wji^-udu to go, to walk
together
all
aU
road, way
gold
\ copper
if
If h
(854 )
vimit^Sm brass
1^^ stomach
^^ to exact
Jf^ each every
J}T\K misfortune
tiTw slave
fl« point of the compass
^-Ofi to cheat to swindle
AM false
YioK to cast
TfioriwRiw auction sale
tifw(j wealth, property
to know
almost
not very good
(1) to. harness
(2) to compare
Thomas
stem helm
to throw out
wtjwif bank note
fst business
I*
joss stick
ordinary, i
custom
U
um
UTJI
UYIU
Tfinu
town, city
ufij m^i Korat
wJmny to worship
boat
clock, watch
in front
window
shameless, impudent
^liitJ torunaivay
truly
in
between
rotten
to lead to conduct
water
tea
sugar
lu
( 855 )
o^wUh
weight
UuflQ
to respect
)hRi
oil
yu
soft
iiUu
firmly closely
MM
(1) lined with
Mmi v^ib
to be fast asleep
cloth (2) cloak
i(iu
hillock
VM
smooth
wtfi
skin leather
iUU
butter
vinlifiD fluli newspaper
mu ii^i
cheese
(J^
quiet
xmnviis
officer
V^UfJI
U) marsh (2) pus UQ
finger, inch
uu
bird & it^
toe
w ud5
parrot
wuoy
little
unft'Jyu
canary
ilo^
little
iini^if)
whistle
iwfio
north
tinfiyu
school boy
ifio
meat, fiesh
Uhifii hooligans, rowdies
m 1
un
to think
u
•
VBtTSin
besides except
tjiyjrii
plentiful
xih
desig, particle
tJjtnR
to eat
ofguns in salutes
tDimi
neighbourhood
^fi ifiu?
a very little
tJhfYi
Company
{491 V\Uf)^
a little
(mercantile)
d-sflJhj
continually
tJlyyS
pure
iitj to count to reckon
dl
mad
( 866 )
tJU
dowlyj^
fifii father Itlinu
ttincu ancient tiSifiu
(1) light (adj) iRoTf^
(2) to go s^
to strenghten
to grumble
ladder staircase
to do carefully
tribe, company
to load
to make pro-
clamation to command
uiu to blossom to open
uKij^ accounts
Ban Kamin (a town)
tfm uon up-country
iratHui^on .
rustics^
an bill
Cu to fly
yoj luck, fortune, merit
uxiM thin, flat
t& to hide
iMj to rule, to ordain
peasants tJ3nv9n
tin
UQTl
titi
Utltl
IJT3
to do homage
fortunately
daring, bold
some, any
Bank
on one side
in future
land
to tell
lesson, chapter
now
wound
(1) to twist
(2) dysentery
son
daughter
to enter the
priesthood
plan, pattern
slave
cowrie shell
large
cushion
( 857)
li
tl: to meet
i]«>in»j assistant ^^^
or deputy official dnjin
ilfffi ]j«u« w Vice-Minister dj: l^-rfl
ilQiIR to support iljrwinw
iljrmi
particulars, point, way
i^Ti^-m notice
tl:m?n to compete
tlmoti composed of
now
to stay in
multitude
people,populacey
meeting
to decorate
presently
door
to give
country
to sit
usage, custom
tJa«t|9 behaviour manners
tl»ncu about
djrp
♦ dsnfitj
tlsrtnj
di
d
idjirfir;
du
dstfi
dojnj
to fix a price
to despise
use, useful
wonderful
to be astonished
desire
to join
to throw
forest, jungle
year
last year
oboe, bagpipe
(1) to pave with
(2) crab
Post office
to blow
to mix
dacoit
to divide
reason,
talent, intelligence
( S68 )
IQPI
itiftjU
d
df^-Kj
diu equal, like
du pin
diili^nj cannon, artillery ditj
dou^ pound sterling &
idi^uu to change
tlif at the time when
d^ to bake
t]^4 to construct
d«w (1) tube (2) chimney
tfoi fill to take care, to
take precautions
to strip
to govern
to fix, to plant
mouth
pen
to deliberate
to plant
strange curious V
idt[m
dflRJB^
ftn
dm
dirim
dtintti •
djn
udi^n
dnnui
dnw-STi
tdj« •
d
to open
idpi mm to raise the hat
to fine
dnudrw to conquer, to
subdue
to compare,
for example
AGU
coimterfeit
fort
end, extremity
di!f)u to loose, to set free
dn ill, sick
u
to desire
without
to shut
please
lawo (1) proud (2) to
soar (3) to come willingly
eji^i well, healthy
cli cloth
ghost
to became rotten
d
^<f{ rm manager
^f[ gentleman
^iflufi-tf traveller
^iMi nij commissary
( 369 )
^
^tkj savage, brigand ^
uejn wound
ejft produce, advantage
W11I3I' fruit
flat, sheet
earth, world
^ crowd, flock, pack
n to send
5lnp»! to drill, to practice
(^
concemins[, on
the side of
N
ej3
(l)to substitute chamberlain manager
(2) to pull hard ^^^y^^ patience
to fasten to tie ^^^ ^.^^
wrong
(1)1, (2) hair
thin
husband
fli (1) waU (2) lid
iixnS partition wall
«
palm of the hand
skill
elifio
to watch, to
have audience of
(iu rain
{jii to dream
{Ii vin coast
ivnufi; palace windows
♦ nju^ u!)4 unR) the title
of the King's brothers
wn^i qn UTiiB the title
. of the King's sons
♦ wj: i-ffwji elder brother
« mz fS'mun palace
♦ fvx: ^ liT throne, any
place where the King sits
♦ fiTi\y\\} heart
♦ w:: YiTu to give
♦ wj: y\m window
♦ W3UUW eye
Royal Palace
( 360)
order command
us: ilcpj i^A(i Prapaton
to want to desire
njsm blessing
nz ^Yinm/ prayer
nm}-] a title Phya
to journey to walk
♦ wCTTBtnu to give
money property
o^er command
to want, to desire
'^ to trust
second palace (Wang Na)
♦ n7:sni omnji 'to punish ^
« i«»)iu place enclosure
mfitn temple
m: m cremation
lorm/ priest
foren^m younger brother
fincirei temple
MQ father
) ffl trader, merchant
fjf) Rfi cook
tn to escort to accompany
fi^utui to investigate
fiviinvi judge
^ iI!m fKi relatives, brother
fif rocket, firework
ifvniu ceiling
urn silk
urn to be spread
\n twoatts •
Imi common.people
nntfizoi policeman
iKi (1) beyond
pass through
thousand
nmu shape, form
niiii quickly, smartly
(861 )
wTu (1) vase (2) to snare IwfeiJ ready
wi« (l)stupid(2)towfeiJTlU together
li
jpeak
(3) base, common
^u floor, surface
iftui patience
i/^Qii friend
i«a1 to miss, to mistake
wau whilst
fli to lean against
/)i to ask, help of
1^4 (i to-morrow
ifvtii tune
um dear
tm4 hollow, cave
i^!j4 until as far as
wn company
i«n itt^ relatives, friends
iTw (1) fan (2) to blow
m-m to stumble fin "i^
^n to speak |^n
iNSn iwfiu of great interest filofi
inn because
if«n:uiKi therefore
iwo to stop, wait, not yet
i
nm
to meet
carpet
sky
fire
electricity,
electric light
conflagration
tooth
alternately
deer
to listen,to hear
straw
(<tm to complain, to accuse
bruise
mattress
to purify, to tan
to beat clothes
(on a stone)
1
111
liJW
ftxi
rliu
ill!
( 362 )
n
U
mile
rrm
language
Ijjf
not very
^im
mountain
V
wood, timber
nnui
wife
mi
drunk
jmyviti
in future
voiii
diligent
muk
inside
irsfii
mother
muuon
outside
UlU
screen, curtain
jm Villi
afterwards
HUM
skilful
•
u
ii:]ii
although
uyud
mankind, people
mjQu
pillow
wnh
coeoanut
IT^li
like, same
lam
mango
^
(1) swollen (2) rich
lidut
the day after
i^w^m
to pay attention to
to-morrow
i£lDI
town, country
WUf]
doctor
i£)m uu
up-counbry
WJl
dog
jTn
addicted to
viinili
wolf
Ulfl
much
vSi
bear
mjn
hat
'^
collection
vonnsnu panamahat
v^^tllu
village
V(Uf\
all
)/^ verandah blinds
jjifi
although
ii^
mother
Sn4f)
to conceal
im^h
river
flfiwn
pocket knife
(868 ;
WJtltJ
mm
dark
to hand over
to kneel before
comer
plenty
to decree
weary
wife
just now
small mattress
U
poison
Japan japanesel^^
Europe
mosquito
%
granary,
di iX)M to fear, to respect ^V^
yiu (1) hanging down
(2)moveable(3)palanquin
Qu to hear
Qu^ pleasure
(lu to stand
tR yet, not yet.
Qi to shoot
6i more
to take away by force
am 4i
to steal, to snatch away
ifioj (1) to turn aside
(2) uneven
chief clerk, secretary
yn ku to lift up
yn li' to raise
inn difficult
WFi drop
(1) to hammer
(2) to hold back
to stop
v\yn Wn to rest at
%}^f\ summit, peak
miu coarse rough gruff
to pick up
to sew
to borrow, to lend
to allow
habitually
( 864 )
WT3
middling^smallbiifiu^
to visit
long
large bell
system
section, joumeyl^j^ ^
nrlu
hi fnu
tjl tJQU
to cause, trouble
reward, prize
body
improved
gambling house
barracks
tw w?jTUT« hospital
to take care
between
magnificent
price
season
to know
toknow quite well
to wander about
^R^u to trouble, to annoy
Ihjn
Jim
to dance
shop
to fight
dollar
house, building
crow's nest
Btllfl
police station
school
sawmill
boots, shoe
track
story
to love
D guard, tocai
to call
flavour
rickshaw
railway
present government
jjju-w government
(365 )
Hi
T3U
populace
power, might
to save oneself \m rtu
quickly
to receive
hi
partake of/
to eat
uou 1
iu Qfi imu independant
Hi^i
rm
nunu
to answer for,
to guarantee
to command
nimble restless
level flat
to hurry
form, shape
&Q11J
fe
n
picture
around
(1) altogether
(2) to include
Ihjtj Iqu well-arranged,
tidy
ni joy, pleasant
flj near, by the side of
total
at intervals
report
cruel fierce
quick
slow, dilatory
(h) ufk IvJ steam boat
fit) sTj ferry boat
mano'war
fence, hedge
theatre
in detail
to fuse
to attract
(1) wheel )2) tj)
jest, to banter
to say good bye
auction sale
to flow
to drive away,
to dismiss
m to say, to explain
iT^^ spirit alcoholic liquor
ifit^lfi
(366 )
iviih viii brandy
mitlifiyf^ beer
mih nH^ wine
iItuti trouble
vi^ steps
ihu a)bald (2)maUon
tlu4 tfe to give a dinner
]fn to steal
Bf appearence
inn to pull
vinr\ to be astonished
win (1) to get out of
i^QUfiiDu London
^
i
intiM
nnu (1) to sail (2) to runt^^^ ^^y <2) passingplace
fin
deep
simply, entirely ft! t?^ii^ key
(1) sledge (2) to F ^ servant
move, to drag
to punish
to miss the way,
to forget
infatuated
roof
below, beneath
to watch
uncle
to try
Vif^n (1) royal, (2) a title
^'^ii^nSfi disobedient
i^w (1) to keep(2) to feed
iviiin
t
f n am kitten
iton
«n(! world
i^Ron f^v to deceive
to choose
to cease
to lower
IfiQf)
fTyif
Vision
religious
formula, code
(1) flat (2) to
spread out
to be untied
tube, pipe, lamp
chimney
( 367 )
tiifi wire
Vinu invisible
fTu secret
vtim asleep
nu wind
iSiu (1) interpreter
• (2) to tie up
to forget
low
cape
to enclose
side, angle
square
varigated
inferior
iVit^n to turn round
71 wah— 2 metres
')^M splendid
'Vin knowledge
^nn reasoning
^1 method
Inm disturbance quarrel
'^m marvellous special
171)1 itu evening
Xi day
ill ifln birthday
^ 7KJ trouble tumult
i)u (1) exempt (2) unless
% ^ excepted.
dizzy
palace
to expect
to hope
k
Tf\
to, place to deposit
vacant at leisure
temple
«
-Dfi i^^M tbdraw pictures
vinnimjQ to be startled
to swim
kite
cow, ox
irmu^
mi) am
n
law court
civil court
(368 )
rififiTyniN power might
enemy
education
happy
sawk, cubit
to make merit
fractioUi part
rich man
An
Anwi
ran
corpse
tf^^ te be startled
u«rw to explain, to tell
«rf!n safe, safety
* iirJl^ to come, to go
irfi mind, attention,
irynfi pleasant, cheerful!^
n^r\ united, associated
iruTjjTit^ lawn, common
nuiu well, healthy
frwTu bridge
Hv/% to fast
iirijuu clerk
HUfi book
ifOIQ
always
fttiP) mm to shudder
iraiu
Siam
m:
pond, lake
nnz
to let go
ntih
diverse
♦ llV3tJ
to eat, to enjoy
inn
daylight, light
tnn
to store up
flQiri
clean
«nTji«
to swear, oath
irunjti
able, strong,brav€
mfi
husband
injffh
of all kinds
mi^
harsh, cruel
jT
colour
itmiu^
Minister
V
entrails
tw^Rin
rubbish, dirt
iffi
post
ihROj
important
ihnnj
well, healthy
fhfi^ finii^ed, completed
(869 )
mintn to converse
tf^i to promise
agreement, contractjim^
i& short
ftuiti fini stone rock
lu (1) end (2) |Byery thing
ir3u
flvinnu
(i) Sen (2) nerve
garden
part, share
war
animal
faithful virtuous
finished
to insert
to enquire
^ (i) to smoke 2 to pump
im^ to eat to associate
ifmtf^n fellow-drinker,
pot-companions
examination
to doubt to mistrust
M to send
ffiififi to notice
di to order
frMi to build
iii^W Singapore
h something, thing
fi tall, high
ifhniiin woollen cloth
^l«r bright
frn fresh
iTn^ enemy
suitable befitting
to succeed
according to one's wishes
i^QU
frxi
riches
to decrease
(1) late (2) line
girl
beautiful
to regret the loss of
i^Q tiger
mat
clothes
1^
i^Q
( 870 )
ifct cowardice peevish
(2) to squire
VI
tower
t^Q
journey^
ft
p ear
m\ to bark
VM tiTj way, path, j
Vim goose
ni9 tail
vni separated, distant
1^ shop, store
9ii shelf
iiw • place
tfei room
tfei Rjg kitchen
rtfci intj iwi^i tap-room, bar
tteilj^^u cellar
ttei UQU bed room
itej Jfj iinn reception room
vin av\u to refuse
ra (1) obstacle (2)
tfii to break
uv^n to force open
T^ifi shoal, reef
m^ cause reason matter
ftu box, chest
^ to prevent
WTtj well, cured
Vii^ mu lost
m old, over ripe
\i to carry
Vim oyster
w I's heart
vH v\tK chief
v« in: to laugh
to deceive, to mislead
1«
• •
permission
besides, as well
Vice-minister
limit
delicious
BTflTJ
symptom, appearance
(871)
trcf
BT^fid week
aged
Arab
weapon
to dwell, dwelling °3[
food
^urm^ gentle, not brave
^uiy device stratagem
^t>w tunnel passage
diligence perseverence
loi^ steam
tornff occasion
BT3 fio sow harbour
diuni Mrs.
diui^ power authority
district officer
danger
other
warm
soft
fat
English
dij to rely upon
fin more
noise, disturbance
att
fuang's worth of atts
own continually
n-n capable daring
fij brick
supernatural power
pw wyu to support
mfi to boast
QU
(1) scent (2) to be kind to
f idl satisfied
to carry, to lift
pretty
shame
low fellow
gulf, bay
tumult disturbance
a
mm hotel, inn
p
AD VBRTISEMBNTS,
rsM^s*
BY APPOIMTMBNT
KIAM HOA HENG & CO.
THE WBTTBLEY OF BANGKOK
EAST SIDE OF BIVEB HENAM.
niPOBTEBS, OF ALL KINDS :
WiseSiSplrits, Hardware and Fancy Goods
SPECIAL ATTENTION PAID TO
UP-COUNTRY ORDESS.
H Presh Suppllea of Goods m
M Arriving Weekly
"■ We aim only to please 09
a Do you want anytUng "
* You are sure to get the Best S8
S at honest value at It
^ KIAH HOA HENG'S §
S** THE UNIVERSAL PBOVWEBS OF THE S
CITY OF THE O
rJAI L-ERT
GBNB^RAl^ STORS •> HOTBI^.
TABLE REQUISITES & DECORATIONS.
Carriages and Steam Launches on liire
Sole Agent for the BANGKOK MANU-
FACTTTRING Go's., Aerated Waters, and
the fJEonous ' New Home ' Sewing Machine.
AH SEEANG
TAILOR.
Begs to submit the patronage of the public.
White, and other suits of first-class style, fit
and quality at moderate prices. Customers at-
tended at their residences on receipt of post-
card, giving their name and place of residence.
Almost opposite to the
BANGBAK MARKET
K. ISONAGA & CO.
fbolognvbm from pm
^n^ertat^e to execute eVer\fK(in^of d*^otograpf\ic%Dor^.
l^e^^efoping and Sprinting of (Slmateu/s dlegatives.
Stodio opposite the British Legation,
K&W ROAD.
C. PAPPAYflNOPULOS
M ANUFAOTtrRER OF HIGH CLASS
EGYPTIAN CIGARETTES.
Choicest Turkish Tobacco, and the best Petchaboon
Siamese Tobacco, always fresh in stock.
New Road, Bangkok.
By Special Appoiniment to
H. M. THE KING OF SIAM.
^<miu yi an im yi flmmw fiflu n^u n^n ^ r^^ fi
VACUUM OIL COMPANY.
The Company Stock 40 varieties of Engine and
Cylinder Oil. The best Oils are unsurpassed and
hold the premier position in the lubricating World.
Motor Oils a distmct speciality, made on scientific
principles.
TheorUy OU thai aJM^aysOUa as OUshotdd always Oil.
Local Manager— E. H. V. MAYNE.
KEE CHIANG & SONS
OHABEO W KBPlfQ ROAD, TA LAT NOL
By Appointmbnt Pubvetobs to
TS.^TS. Cbc Crown prince of Sfam.
PaOVZBZOV WZITB and SPZRZT
CHAROEN KRUN6 PHOTOGRAPHIC STUDIO.
J. ANTONIO —Proprietor,
NEW ROAD, BANOKOK.
Awarded Stiver Medal Hanoi Exhibition iQOft-lQOS.
Silver Medal St. Louis Exhibition 1904.
A large eollection of Views and Types of Siam
Illustrated Post Cards.
Illustrated Guide Book to Bangkok and Siam.
Amateur's Plates developed and finished at moder-
ate charges.
A. M. ADAM 8. A. LEBBAY & CO.
INDIAN MERCHANTS, WHOLESALE
AND RETAIL.
Fancy Goods of all Descriptioii&
Ladies and Gentlemen's Outfitters.
WAT KOH STREET, - BANGKOK.
H. SWEE HO.
GENERA L MERCHANTS & IM PORTERS.
PBOPRIETORS of the NATIONAL CHEMICAL DEPOT, Im-
porters of Drags and Chemical Dealers in SoIuUe and Flaronr-
ing Essences, Colonrings Acid Snlphnrio, and Soda Bicarbonate.
Patent Medicines, Gkssware and Druggists Sundries. Suppliers of
Aeiated Water Ingredients and Requisites.
Established 1871.
BXMQKOK :
JKddrett* Pit Saticn Brid0«, Cliaro€fi Kruag ltoad«
IRON FOUNDERS
*^^_^ IMPORTERS AND
GENERAL CON-
1^^ TRACTORS.
^ ^^^ Bangkok,
SHIP ^^ ^^ Singapore,
J. ^ ^^9 Canton
LAUNCH
BUILDERS,
BRIDGE
BUILDERS AND
BOILER-MAKERS.
FOOK LOOIMG
8ILYEE MEDAL HANOI EXHIBrriOli.
Contractor, Manufacturer of First Class Fur-
niture, Cabinet Maker, Boat Builder and Painter.
Furniture of every description made to order and
from any design.
A large quantity of ready made furniture
in stock.
Works and repairs executed with despatch.
Customers attended at their residences upon
receipt of a post-card.
p. W . Wijeratne & Co!
BUYERS AND SELLERS
OP
GENERAL PRODUCTS OF SIAM.
Building (shortly to be opened) opposite the
BRITISH LEGATION.
Branches at Paknampo, Korat and Chamtaboon.
S. S. MARICAN
INDIAN STORE.
SILK AND CLOTH MERCHANTS.
Wholesale and RetaQ Importers, Dealers in all kinds of
Indian, Giinese and Japanese Silk and Sundry Goods.
New Road, nearly opposite the French Bank, Bangkok.
Cbe ffrst Mly Hcwtmor fi Sim.
PUBLISHED IN ENGLISH AND SIAMESE
EVERY EVENING.
( Looal - To8. 40 per an.
Sntfiorlptloii Rates \
i Forelgm - £2 ISs. Od. ,,
EBreUSH EDITION.
Subscription Local - - Tcs. 20 per annum
Foreign - - - £110s. Od. „
S^ium Muitxi
SliHESE WEEKLY EDITION.
Subscription Local - - Tc& 15 per annum.
Moderate Advertising Rates
And Special Terms for Contracts
All kinds of printing at the
SIAM OBSERVER PRINTING WORKS
Oriental Avenue— Bangkok.
" wASHnr&Toir " iimt aito
M&nrEEEnr& go.
W, GROSSJOHAKN & CO., BANGKOK.
Sole Importers for the genuine WASHINGTON LIGHT
D. R. PATENT. Patented in almost all civilized coon-
tries. The cheapest light at the present time,
a 600 candle power lamp will use H atts kerosine ou
par hour.
No Engines Required, No Danger, No TrooUe
Common Kerosine oil tued only.
GENERAL CONTRACTORS
The above ^irm will undertake repairs of Automobiles,
Spare Parts, as Sparkevils, Sparkplugs, Batteries (90
amperes) also any other parts can be furnished at
cheapest rates.
Repafre of JMecbanCcal Inetrumente.
Sole Agents for : R. WOLF, Engineering and
Boiler Work, Magdeburg, Engle's Work, SoUngen,
Pneumatlo Tool Oo«, Dusseldorf, A. Sohumann
Oo., Armatur and Engine Works, Lelpzlo Plagurtz
IT. a. P.
Representative of the
DEUTZ ET GELDERMANN.
Sec JLT MABJr ■ CHAMP AOITB.
C. G. TIMONELLI'S
GENERAL PROVXSION STORES.
Spe0lali1y of ProvlQlo]i8, Wines and Liqueurs.
New Road,
Opposite the British Legation.
itiihW lift it^fSl vmu nii n idu vtftitj nrUfi
S. TISSEjIIIAN ^ CO.
Qlateb-mahere, leweKere, SflTcremftbe
aiKl General I>ea(er6.
REPAIRS
ESTABLISHEO 1882.
M. CACACE'S STORE
New Road, nearly opposite
Oriental Avenue.
COMMISSION AGENTS
AND
Importers of Italian, German, English and
French Provisions.
^W IN IS .—The largest Stock in Bangkok in
Gases and Casks, Rhine, Burgunmes,
Bordeaux and Italian.
N.B,—As we deal direct with ail the Mamufacburera in
Europe (mr prieee are lower than any other
Store in Siam.
INDIAN STORE
SILK MERCHANTS & MILLINERS.
Wholesale and Retail Inmorters, Dealers in all kinds of
Indian, Chinese and Japanese Silk, Silverware and
Sundry Goods.
NEW ROAD, opposite the French Bank, Bangkok.
FUH8 : FOWEIGN BHiNCHES :
Yokohama, Hongkong,
Manila, Singapore,
Bombay and Europe.
Melbourne, Kobe, Canton,
Saigon, Sourabaya, Mac-
ca8sar,Samarang,Batavia,
Bandoeng, Padang,
Penang, Raj^s^oon, Ceylon
and Calcutta.
GOTTE & CO.
General Printiog
Establisl^ment and
BooK-biQding Department.
SEPARATE STATIONERY
DEPARTMENT.
NEW ROAD, Corner of BUSH LANE.
SEANG LOONG
CARPENTER & CONTRACTOR.
Manufactare of First Class Furniture, Cabinet
Maker, Boat-builder, and Painter. Furniture of
every description made to order from any design.
A large quantity of ready made furniture
in stock.
Works and Repairs executed with despatch.
Customers attended at their residences upon
receipt of a post-card.
WINDMILL ROAD, NEAR BANGRAK
HOSPITAL.
BANGKOK DISPENSARY.
CHEMISTS DRUGGISTS AND OPTICIANS
PATENT MEDICINES, AND SPECTACLES
OF GOLD SILVER, AND NICKEL.
OPTICAL AND CHIRURGICAL INSTRUMENTS
PASTEUR FILTERS.
E S. E. M&TTLIIA & CO.,
RAJAWOira BOAD-BANaKOE.
GENERAL MERCHANTS AND COMMIS
SIGN AGENTS.
ROPES, COTTON, YARNS, CASTOR OIL
TRUNKS, &c., &o.
THE DRAPERY STORE
DTMAH TAUSnES k JAPANESE NOTELHES.
Silk8» Cottonii Lftcea, Hoaerj, Tapestry, Boots, Slioes, Hsfts, Gkss-
ware, SilTerware, Chinaware, £boojware, Clocks, Watches^
StetioDsiy, GreetuDff Cards, Bon-bons, Dolls. Curios
Carpets^ Dados, Side-boai^ds, Flower Pots, Msttings,
Bsmboo Ware, Wooden Ware, and Rattan
G<K>ds, ftc, Ac,
Megfxgpkte Addreu: '* DRAPERS A. B. C. Code, Stk Editim.
TUNG WHO & CO.,
BANORAE.
OBmaAZi p&ovzszoH storb.
Fresh Muttou ou every Weduesday and Sunday
momiutr a speciality.
We beg to notify the public that we have always on hand every
description of goods— Cross and Blackwell's, *MortoQ*8, American,
French, and German Proyisioos also French. Dry froits at moderate
prices.
For the Christmas Season, Fresh and Dry Apples, Walnuts and
Stores of eye^ description. A post-card sent, will be attended to
immediately.
ORIENTAL BAKERY
(ORIENTAL AVENUE).
Have always on liand firesli Biscuits
and Rusks.
Daily supply of WMte Bread and Rolls^
Brown Bread every Wednesday
and Sunday.
Fresli Cakes made every other day.
Wiener Bread on Sunday only.
Other Cakes, Puddings, Tarts, Jellies and
Ice-creams. Supplied to order.
ALL ORDERS PROMPTLY ATTENDED TO.
Yong Lee Seng & Co
Wine, spirit
and Provision
Mere/iants,
Dealers b Horso Food.
Direct Importers of English American,
Dntcn and Frencli Provisions.
Hats and Shoes. Electroplated Ware,
Cigar and Cigarettes, Toilet Requisites,
Patent Medicines, Kitchen Utensils,
Perfamery, Hosiery, lamps, Grlassware
and Sundries of every Description
THE
DIRECTORT FOR BiNGEOK iHO Sli^,
1907
Blghteenth Year of Publication.
STILL ON SALE.
The Directory for Bangkok and Siam
contains a complete and Official List of the
Government Departments and the Principal
Commercial Houses in the country. It is re-
plete with information absolutely essential to
the Merchant, the Trader, the Professional
Man, the Traveller and the Exporter, and is
an invaluable vade mecum. for all who have
any interest in Siam.
THE DIRECTORY FOR BANGKOK
AND SIAM
contains an amount of accurate information
on the history, customs and institutions of
the country, presented in a concise and
readable form.
Published at the Office of the
'* BANGKOK TIMES."
Rrlce Xlcals 1 net.
BANGKOK DOCK OOlPiNT, LIHTED.
E STABLISHED 187 1,
Telegraphic Address : * PROGRESS.'
Codes Used. — A. B. C. and A. /.
CONTRACTORS TO H. 8. M. GOVERNMENT.
jra / ORAVIMO DOCK.
Length on Blocks 300 feet
Depth on sill 11 feet 6 in.
Width of entrance 45 feet
jra J oRMYiHa dock.
Lengrth on Blocks 100 feet
Depth on sill 8 feet
Width of entrance 28 feet
SLIPWAYS.
No. 1 capable of taking up Launches 50 feet and under.
No. 2 capable of taking up Launches 43 feet and under.
Steam sneerlegs capable of lifting 25 tons now in
operation.
Engineers, Boilermakers, Bridge and Jetty Build-
ers, Iron and Brass Founders, Steel and Wood
Launoh Builders, Rioe and Sawmill and
Electrioal Engineers, General
Oontraotors. &o., &c.
■^— "■^^■■■^
All Departments are under European Supervision and
the Workshops, Foundry, and Boilershops, are the best
equipped in Siam and capable of executing all classes of
Bepairs in the most expeditious manner.
Estimates prepared and plans supplied on application
for every description of work.
The Stores Department is under capable European
supervision, and the largest stocks are carried of Engineer-
ing, Electrical, and Shipbuilding Bequisites, also Kce and
Sawmill Stores, and Motor Accessories.
THE
44 '^ '
DAILY EVENINQ NEWSPAPER.
Cable Address :—Free Press, Bangkok.
^HE leading English Newspaper in Siam, also
widely circulated in China, Japan, Cochin-China,
Ceylon, India and the Far East generally.
Subscription (in advance).
DAILY—TICALS 50 PER ANNUM.
Special attention given to effectively display-
ing aavertisements.
The type used as a 8tan«lard for setting advertisements
is similar to this, unless we are instructed to display the
advertisements, when any effective style of type will be
adopted. This standard runs exactly eight lines to the
inch, and about eight words to the line.
COMPLETE ARRANGEMENTS HAVE NOW
BEEN MADE WHICH WILL ENABLE
THIS OFFICE TO UNDERTAKE
ALL KINDS OF
JOB PRINTING
AND
Prospectus Forms^ Debit Notes, Labels, Programmes
of JBntertaimnents, Trade Circulars. Reports, etc
G. BOVO & CO-
General Store & Com-
mission Agents.
COMPAGNIE
des
NESSiCIERIES FLUTIiLES
de
COCHINCHINE.
»
REGULAR Line between Saigon and Bangkok. GonneoUng with
the Company's own t^teamen to Cochin-China, Cambodia and
Laos. Connection with the Mail Steamers of the
MESSA6ERIES MARTTIMES.
Tickets may be obtained in Baingkok providing passage to any
port of call of the French Midi. Passage inelades Wme at Mi^s and
-uie cuisine is anriralled. Connection with the new Eastern Hne of the
CHABGEURS REUNIS.
TluB Company has earned a high reputation for the care thevtakc
in the tranq>ort of all goods. Goods carried to and from Bordeaux,
Saint-NaBaire,Le Havre, Dimkerque, Antwerp, London, Liverpool, ftc.
Bangkok Aoenct — ^Bush Lake.
J. PRANQON,— Aflfent, Bangkok.
THE PALACE HOTEL.
SEEKAK PHY A SRI,- CITY.
BOARD AND RESmENCE BY THE MONTH
SUPERIOR CUISINE
WINES AND SPIRITS OF THE BEST QUALTTY.
W. SOHXJNDEN,— Pr<>pmtor.
CHAROEN ESUNG R0AD-CIT7.
PrQTisions and Wines, Cigars and Cigarettes, in
great variety. Fresh supplies monthly : Perfum-
ery, China and Glassware.
CARRIAGE REQUISITES OF ALL KINDS
Sole Selling Agent for the Dusit Soda and Sweet
Aerated Waters.
SIAM RATHAKITGH
Carriage and Coach Bufldere.
Carriu;e8 of all kinds built to order. Rejpairs Dished
Tension Steel Wheels, India-rubber Tyres fitted.
JUoterials Orderedfrcm Europe Direet
MODERATE PRICES.
VERAJ PAS AT
CHAROEN KRUNG ROAD— CITY.
Ladies and Gentleman's Outfitters.
Patent Medicines and Drugs.
fF^ ihi vtl^ Til vm u\ m *]
mhi m mw ifi iipw Quw ft
Mackay & Macarthur
LIMITED.
CONSULTING ENGINEERS.
SHIP AND ENGINEER SURVEYORS
AT BANGKOK TO LLOYD'S AGENTS,
BUREAU VERITAS, BRITISH OOR;
PORATION REGISTRY, DET NORSKE
VERITAS, GERMANISCHER LLOYD
AND LOCAL OFFICES.
AGENTS for:
Langsuan Tin Mining Company, Limited. Ba^,
Thompson & Company, Limited. Babcock and
Wilcox Limited. Siam Prospecting Co.. Ltd.,
&c, &c., &C.
ft
Telsgraphie Address:
Enterprise— Bangkok : Office at Oriental Avenue.
P6h Yome— Glasgow : 52, Robertson Steeet
CODE8 : A. B, C.5TH. AND WESTERN UNION.
C. L. Groundwater,~M.LE.S.,
Manager.
ROBERT GOTTE.
0j QUI li)escpipli0i)s
Bzecxif eol wif I) z)eetf i)ess ^ayk despecfcl)
Opeciodify 0J
»»xn3tc;&i
if«K
A Large Stock of High-
Class Stationery.
PRICES MODERATE
]t^W VYPE 7IND ]iI)IGFINEI(7
Printing Office at the Comer of the
Lane, leading to the
AmERlCAn LEGATIon.
LIEM CHIANG
TAILOR.
WINDMILL ROAD
BRIDGE,
NEW ROAD,
BANGKOK.
21. HALKn.
Dealer in all kinds
of Goods.
Commission Agent
and Auctioneer.
RONG PIM PHAI SARN
BAN NAN It
Wat Ralabhophit
Street
General Printing
and Book Binding
Establishment.
NAI TAI,
MANAGER.
Engineers and Contractors.
Sole Agents for :
EIFFEL BRIDGES,
" GLOBE '' TOBACCO & CIGARETTES.
TAN KENG WHAY.
Auctioneer and Estate Asrent. Head Office at
Talat Noi, (near Pumping Water Works) , East side
of the river.
Sale Rooms No. 17 and 18, at Phawurat Road, City.
TAN KENG WHAY.
Assistants r
LIM CH<X)N HOH, ANG CHIN TIT, AND
• TWO SIAMESE.
SeeKoK DispcQsary City.
H. ADAMSEN and WALTER B. TOY
ATTENDANT PHYSICIANS.
Consultation^ (U the Dispensary free to all those
UNABLE TO PAY.
Fresh Vaccine Virus always on hand
MEDICINE CHESTS SUPPLIED.
Dru^ of the first Quality only are employed.
Prescriptions filled at all hours of the
DAY OR NIGHT.
PATENT MEDICINES OF ALL KINDS
PERFUMERY & SCENTED SOAP.
Siam Advertising Co.
Klong Kut Mai & New Road,
Bangkok, Siam.
All kinds of Advertising, Billposting,
Pamphlet Distributing, Newspaper,
and Magazine Advertising, Tramway
and Railway Advertising.
We control all the advertising rights
on all the Railways and Tramways in
Siam also in the City of Bangkok.
An expert staft of " ad " writers and
translators at your disposal.
C. HERMANN
Carriage Builder and Painter,
Contractor.
for all kinds of work such as painting carriages.,
Motor Cars, Houses, Wooden and Iron Furniture.
also
Dealer in Paint and Vamishea
THE BRITISH
DISPENSARY,
THE LEADING PHARMACY
BANGKOK.
Speciality of Photographic
Apparatus and Materials
of every description.
American * Presbyterian
Mission -> Press.
ESTABLISHED 1866.
GeneraJ Printing £stablishxn«:it
BooK Printing in Siamese or Elnglish :
Prospectus Forms, and Business Forms with
any kind of special Ruling Required :
A Speciality of Account Books in any size,
with any Ruling and Strongest Binding.
^ook ^indtrtff of all J^inds,
LARGEST EQUIPMENT OF TYPE
IN BANGKOK.
All Work done with Neatness and Despatch.
KLONG POH YOME,
1st Bridge from New Road.
J. 5. DUNLAP,
Manager.
Memoranda
o
i 1
& a
Si
8
kA rn
'i
P5
Rising.
*E S
i
Acute.
-jE ^E
^ g
Dropped
aE =»S "E
^E
g
Deep.
-E -S
-i
^E 3p M
Common
E E
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11